Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
328i
328i xDrive
335i
335i xDrive
335is
M3
Owner's Manual for Vehicle
Congratulations, and thank you for choosing a BMW.
Thorough familiarity with your vehicle will provide you with
enhanced control and security when you drive it. We therefore
have this request:
Please take the time to read this Owner's Manual and familiarize
yourself with the information that we have compiled for you
before starting off in your new vehicle. It contains important data
and instructions intended to assist you in gaining maximum use
and satisfaction from your BMW's unique range of technical
features. The manual also contains information on maintenance
designed to enhance operating safety and contribute to
maintaining the value of your BMW throughout an extended
service life.
This manual is supplemented by a Service and Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet for US models or a Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models.
We wish you an enjoyable driving experience.
BMW Group
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
© 2010 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts,
only with the written consent of
BMW AG, Munich.
US English II/10, 03 10 500
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contents
The quickest way to find special topics is to
consult the index, refer to page 258.
Using this Owner's Manual
4 Notes
7 Reporting safety defects
At a glance
10 Cockpit
16 iDrive
21 Letters and numbers
22 Voice activation system
Controls
26 Opening and closing
42 Adjustments
52 Transporting children safely
55 Driving
75 Controls overview
88 Technology for driving comfort and
safety
101 Lamps
106 Climate
111 Practical interior accessories
Driving tips
126 Things to remember when driving
Navigation
134 Navigation system
135 Destination entry
144 Destination guidance
151 What to do if …
Entertainment
154 On/off and tone
157 Radio
160 Satellite radio
165 CD/DVD player and CD changer
172 Music collection
177 External devices
Communications
184 Telephone
196 Contacts
198 BMW Assist
Mobility
206 Refueling
208 Wheels and tires
222 Under the hood
227 Maintenance
229 Care
233 Replacing components
238 Giving and receiving assistance
Reference
246 Technical data
251 Short commands for the voice activation
system
258 Everything from A to Z
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Notes
4
Notes
Using this Owner's Manual
We have tried to make all the information in this
Owner's Manual easy to find. The fastest way to
find specific topics is to refer to the detailed
index at the back of the manual. If you wish to
gain an initial overview of your vehicle, you will
find this in the first chapter.
Should you sell your BMW some day, please
remember to hand over the Owner's Manual as
well; it is an important component of your vehi-
cle.
Additional sources of information
Should you have any other questions, your
BMW center will be glad to advise you at any
time.
Information on BMW, e.g. on technical aspects,
can also be found on the Internet at
www.bmwusa.com.
Symbols used
Indicates precautions that must be fol-
lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
the vehicle.<
Indicates information that will assist you
in gaining the optimum benefit from your
vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
for your vehicle.<
Refers to measures that can be taken to
help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
tion.
* Indicates special equipment, country-spe-
cific equipment and optional accessories,
as well as equipment and functions not yet
available at the time of printing.
"..." Identifies Control Display texts used to
select individual functions.
{...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
{{...}} Identifies the answers generated by the
voice activation system.
Symbols on vehicle components
Indicates that you should consult the rel-
evant section of this Owner's Manual for
information on a particular part or assembly.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
5
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
The individual vehicle
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Manual
describes the entire array of options and equip-
ment available with a specific BMW model.
Please bear in mind that the manual may con-
tain information on accessories and equipment
that you have not specified for your own vehicle.
Sections describing options and special equip-
ment are marked by asterisks
* to assist you in
identifying possible differences between the
descriptions in this manual and your own vehi-
cle's equipment.
If equipment in your BMW is not described in
this Owner's Manual, please refer to the accom-
panying Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Editorial notice
BMW pursues a policy of continuous, ongoing
development that is conceived to ensure that
our vehicles continue to embody the highest
quality and safety standards combined with
advanced, state-of-the-art technology. For this
reason, it is possible in exceptional cases that
features described in this Owner's Manual
could differ from those on your vehicle.
For your own safety
Maintenance and repair
Advanced technology, e.g. the use of
modern materials and powerful electron-
ics, requires specially adapted maintenance
and repair methods. You should therefore have
the corresponding work on your vehicle per-
formed only by your BMW center or at a work-
shop that works according to BMW repair pro-
cedures with correspondingly trained
personnel. If this work is not carried out prop-
erly, there is a danger of subsequent damage
and related safety hazards.<
Parts and accessories
For your own safety, use genuine parts
and accessories approved by BMW.
When you purchase accessories tested and
approved by BMW and Original BMW Parts, you
simultaneously acquire the assurance that they
have been thoroughly tested by BMW to ensure
optimum performance when installed on your
vehicle.
BMW warrants these parts to be free from
defects in material and workmanship.
BMW will not accept any liability for damage
resulting from installation of parts and accesso-
ries not approved by BMW.
BMW cannot test every product made by other
manufacturers to verify if it can be used on a
BMW safely and without risk to either the vehi-
cle, its operation, or its occupants.
Original BMW Parts, BMW Accessories and
other products approved by BMW, together
with professional advice on using these items,
are available from all BMW centers.
Installation and operation of accessories not
approved by BMW, such as alarms, radios,
amplifiers, radar detectors, wheels, suspension
components, brake dust shields, telephones,
including operation of any mobile phone from
within the vehicle without using an externally
mounted antenna, or transceiver equipment, for
instance, CBs, walkie-talkies, ham radio or sim-
ilar accessories, may cause extensive damage
to the vehicle, compromise its safety, interfere
with the vehicle's electrical system or affect the
validity of the BMW Limited Warranty. See your
BMW center for additional information.<
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of
the emission control devices and sys-
tems may be performed by any automotive
repair establishment or individual using any
certified automotive part.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Notes
6
California Proposition 65 warning
California law requires us to issue the following
warning:
Engine exhaust and a wide variety of
automobile components and parts,
including components found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects and reproductive harm. In
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm.
Battery posts, terminals and related accesso-
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash
your hands after handling.
Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always
protect your skin by washing thoroughly with
soap and water.<
Service and warranty
We recommend that you read this publication
thoroughly.
Your BMW is covered by the following warran-
ties:
> New Vehicle Limited Warranty
> Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
> Federal Emissions System Defect Warranty
> Federal Emissions Performance Warranty
> California Emission Control System Limited
Warranty
Detailed information about these warranties is
listed in the Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models or in the Warranty and
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models.
Your vehicle has been specifically adapted and
designed to meet the particular operating con-
ditions and homologation requirements in your
country and continental region in order to
deliver the full driving pleasure while the vehicle
is operated under those conditions. If you wish
to operate your vehicle in another country or
region, you may be required to adapt your vehi-
cle to meet different prevailing operating condi-
tions and homologation requirements. You
should also be aware of any applicable warranty
limitations or exclusions for such country or
region. In such case, please contact Customer
Relations for further information.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
7
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Reporting safety defects
For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles owned
and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration,
NHTSA, in addition to notifying BMW of
North America, LLC, P.O. Box 1227,
Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order
a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your center, or BMW of
North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers
Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call 1-
800-333-0510 toll-free from anywhere in Can-
ada or 1-613-993-9851 from the Ottawa region
and from other countries, or contact Transport
Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD,
Place de Ville, Tower C, 330 Sparks Street,
Ottawa, ON, K1A 0N5.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
This overview of buttons, switches and displays
is intended to familiarize you with your vehicle's
operating environment. The section will also
assist you in becoming acquainted with the
control concepts and options available for
operating the various systems.
At a glance
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Cockpit
10
Cockpit
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
4 Folding exterior mirrors in and out* 50
5 Adjusting exterior mirrors, automatic curb
monitor
* 50
1
Convertible: opening and closing
windows jointly 35
2
Convertible: opening and closing
rear windows 35
3
Opening and closing front
windows 35
6
Parking lamps 101
Low beams 101
Automatic headlamp control
* 101
Adaptive light control
* 102
High-beam assistant
* 103
7
Fog lamps
* 104
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
11
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
9 Instrument cluster 12
12 Ignition lock 55
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
15 Horn, entire surface
16 Adjusting the steering wheel 51
18 Releasing the hood 222
19 Opening the trunk lid 31
8
Turn signals 64
High beams, headlamp
flasher 103
High-beam assistant
* 103
Roadside parking lamps
* 103
Computer 76
Settings and information about
the vehicle 79
10
Windshield wipers 65
Rain sensor
* 65
11
Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 55
Telephone*:
Accepting and ending a call; dial-
ing
* the selected phone number;
redialing if no phone number is
selected
Volume
Activating/deactivating voice
activation system
* 22
Changing the radio station
Interrupting a traffic bulletin
Selecting a music track
Scrolling through the redial list
Next entertainment source
Recirculated-air mode 108
14
Steering wheel heating
* 51
17
Cruise control
* 66
Active cruise control
* 68
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Cockpit
12
Instrument cluster
1 Speedometer
2 Indicator lamps for turn signals
3 Indicator and warning lamps 13
4 Displays for active cruise control
* 68
5 Tachometer 75
6 Engine oil temperature 76
7 Display for
> Clock 75
> Outside temperature 75
> Indicator and warning lamps 84
8 Display for
> Position of automatic transmission
* 58
> Gear indicator in 7-gear Sports
automatic transmission with
double clutch
* 60
> Computer 76
> Date of next scheduled service, and
remaining distance to be driven 80
> Odometer and trip odometer 75
> High-beam assistant
* 103
> Checking engine oil level
* 223
> Settings and information 79
> There is a Check Control
message 84
9 Fuel gauge 76
10 Resetting the trip odometer 75
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
13
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator and warning lamps
The concept
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Text messages
Text messages at the top edge of the Control
Display describe the meanings of the indicator
and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control, refer to
page 84.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
as soon as the corresponding lamp comes on.
Indicator lamps without text messages
The following indicator lamps notify you that
certain functions are active:
High beams/headlamp flasher 103
Fog lamps
* 104
Lamp flashes:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive forces in order to maintain driving
stability 90
parking brake applied 57
Canada: parking brake applied 57
engine malfunction with adverse effect
on emissions 228
Canada: engine malfunction with
adverse effect on emissions 228
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Cockpit
14
Around the center console: controls and displays
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
15
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
1 Coupe: microphone for voice activation
system
* and for telephone* in hands-free
mode
Convertible: microphone on steering col-
umn
2 SOS: initiating an Emergency Request
call
* 238
3 Reading lamps 105
4 Coupe: glass roof, electric
* 37
5 Interior lamps 105
6 Passenger airbag status lamp
* 99
7 Control Display 16
8 Hazard warning flashers
9 Dynamic Traction Control DTC 90
10 Central locking system 30
11 Automatic climate control
12 CD/DVD drive
* 165
13 Changing the audio and entertainment
sources
14 Selecting AM or FM waveband
15 Changing
> Radio station 157
> Track 165
17 Controller 16
Can be turned, pressed, or moved in four
directions
18 Buttons on the controller 16
Selecting menus directly
20 Programmable memory keys 20
21 Switching entertainment audio sources on/
off and adjusting volume 154
22 Ejecting a CD/DVD
* 165
Air distribution to the
windshield 107
Air distribution to the upper body
area 107
Air distribution to the footwell 107
Automatic air distribution and flow
rate 107
Cooling function 108
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC and recirculated-air
mode 108
Maximum cooling 107
ALL program 108
Air volume 108
Defrosting windows 108
Rear window defroster 108
Heated seats
* 47
16
Park Distance Control PDC
* 88
Coupe:
Roller sun blind
* 114
Coupe:
Hill Descent Control HDC
* 90
19
Convertible:
Opening and closing retractable
hardtop 38
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
iDrive
16
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large num-
ber of switches. This allows these functions to
be operated from a single central position. The
following section provides an introduction to
basic menu navigation. The control of the indi-
vidual functions is described in connection with
the relevant equipment.
Controls
1 Control Display
2 Controller with buttons
You can use the buttons to open the menus
directly. The controller can be used to
select the menu items and create settings.
> Move in four directions, arrow 3
> Turn, arrow 4
> Push, arrow 5
Operate the controller only when traffic
and road conditions allow this, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
17
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Buttons on the controller
Operating principle
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
refer to page 55, the following message is dis-
played on the Control Display:
To hide the message:
Press the controller.
The main menu is displayed.
The message is automatically hidden after
approx. 10 seconds.
Opening the main menu
Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
All iDrive functions can be called up via the main
menu.
Selecting a menu item
The menu items shown in white can be
selected.
1. Turn the controller until the desired menu
item is highlighted.
2. Press the controller.
A new menu is displayed or the function is exe-
cuted.
Menu items in the Owner's Manual
In the Owner's Manual, menu items that can
be selected are set in quotation marks,
e.g. "Settings".
Changing between panels
After selecting a menu item, e.g. "Radio", a new
menu is displayed on a panel. The panels can
overlap.
Button Function
MENU Open the main menu
RADIO Open the Radio menu
CD Open the CD/Multimedia menu
NAV Open the Navigation menu
TEL Open the Telephone menu
BACK Display the previous menu
OPTION Open the Options menu
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
iDrive
18
Move the controller to the left or right to change
between the panels.
White arrows pointing to the left or right indi-
cate that additional panels can be opened.
Open the Options menu
Press the OPTION button.
The "Options" menu is displayed.
Another possibility: move the controller to the
right repeatedly until the "Options" menu
appears.
The "Options" menu contains the following:
> Screen settings, refer to page 19.
> Control options for the selected menu.
Adjusting settings
1. Select a field.
2. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed.
3. Press the controller to confirm the setting.
The scroll bar on the right side indicates
whether additional menu items or set-
tings can be selected that are currently not vis-
ible.<
Example: setting the clock
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Turn the controller until "Settings" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
3. Turn the controller until "Time/Date" is
highlighted, and then press the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
19
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
4. Turn the controller until "Time:" is high-
lighted, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller to set the hours and
press the controller.
6. Turn the controller to set the minutes and
press the controller.
Status information
1 Time
2 Display for:
> Reception strength of the wireless
network, depends on the mobile phone
> Incoming, outgoing or missed call
> SMS
* received
3 Display for:
> Entertainment:
Radio, CD/DVD, external devices
> Telephone
*:
Name of the mobile phone paired with
the vehicle
4 Sound output is switched off or
display for traffic bulletins
*:
> "TI":
Traffic bulletins are switched on.
> No display:
Traffic bulletins are switched off.
Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
Check Control message displays or entries via
the voice activation system
*.
Switching the Control Display
off/on
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Switch off control display"
Press the controller to switch on.
Professional navigation system: split
screen
Additional information, e.g. from the computer,
can be displayed on the right side of the split
screen.
On the split screen, this information remains
visible even when you change to another menu.
Switching the split screen on and off
1. Press the OPTION button.
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
iDrive
20
Selecting the display for the split
screen content
When the split screen is switched on, you can
select the content displayed on the screen.
1. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
2. Select the display.
Programmable memory keys
Certain iDrive functions can be stored on the
programmable memory keys and called up
directly, e.g. radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and entry points into the
menu.
Storing functions
1. Highlight the function via the iDrive.
2. ... Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Example for programmable memory
keys
Switch the voice instructions for the navigation
on/off.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol using the controller.
4. ... Press the desired key for
longer than two seconds.
Executing a function
... Press the button.
The function is executed immediately. This
means, for example, that the number is dialed
when a phone number is selected.
Displaying memory key assignments
Touch the button with a finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
Displaying brief information
... Touch the button.
The key assignment is displayed at the top
edge of the screen.
Displaying detailed information
... Touch the button for an
extended period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
21
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Letters and numbers
Entering letters and numbers
1. Turn the controller: select the letters or
numbers.
2. Select additional letters or numbers if
needed.
3. "OK": confirm the entry.
Switching between letters and
numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch
between entering letters and numbers:
Wordmatch concept during navigation
Entry of names and addresses: the selection is
narrowed down every time a letter is entered
and letters may be added automatically.
Destination search: the entries are continuously
compared to the data stored in the vehicle.
> The only letters offered for entering
addresses are those for which data are
available.
> Town/city names can be entered with
the spelling used in any of the languages
available on the Control Display.
Symbol Function
Press the controller: delete
one letter or number
Press the controller for an
extended period: delete all
letters or numbers
Enter a blank space
Symbol Function
Entering letters
Entering numbers
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Voice activation system
22
Voice activation system
The concept
The voice activation system allows you to con-
trol operation of various vehicle systems with-
out removing your hands from the steering
wheel.
Most menu items on the Control Display can be
voiced as commands. It is not necessary to use
the controller.
The voice activation system transforms your
oral commands into control signals for the
selected systems and provides support in the
form of instructions or questions.
Coupe: the voice activation system uses a spe-
cial microphone located in the area of the inte-
rior rearview mirror, refer to page 14.
Convertible: the voice activation system uses a
special microphone located in the area of the
steering column.
Precondition
Via iDrive, select the language in which the
voice activation system is operating, so that the
spoken commands can be identified. Selecting
the language for iDrive, refer to page 87.
Symbols in the Owner's Manual
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
This symbol on the Control Display and
an acoustic signal indicate that the voice
activation system is ready to receive spo-
ken commands.
2. Say the command.
The command appears on the Control Dis-
play.
This symbol appears on the Control Display
when you can enter additional commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
*
{...} Say the specified commands word for
word.
{{...}} Indicates responses of the voice acti-
vation system.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
At a glance
23
Reference ControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Terminating or canceling voice
activation system
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
In dialogs that call for a text of your choice, the
procedure can only be canceled using the but-
ton on the steering wheel.
Possible commands
The commands available in each case depend
on the menu item selected on the Control Dis-
play.
To have the available commands read aloud:
For example, if "CD" is selected, the commands
for operating CD/Multimedia are read aloud.
Calling up functions immediately via
short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions immediately, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, refer to page 251.
Example: selecting the track of a CD
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Setting the voice dialog
You can set whether the system should use the
standard dialog or a shorter variant. In the
shorter variant of the voice dialog, the prompts
and responses from the system are abbrevi-
ated.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. To select the setting:
> "Default"
> "Short"
Notes
To operate the phone by voice, refer to
page 192.<
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Do not use the voice activation system to
initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the
establishment of a telephone connection.
> Pronounce the commands and digits
smoothly and at normal volume, avoiding
excessive emphases and pauses. This also
applies when spelling out and saying a full
word during destination entry.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
> For entries in the voice-activated phone
book, only use names in the language
of the voice activation system and no
abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and glass roof
closed to prevent interference from outside
noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
{Cancel}
{Voice commands} or {Help}
3. Select the music track, e.g.:
{C D track 4}
System says:
{{Track 4}}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
This chapter is intended to provide you with
information for complete control of your vehicle.
All features and accessories that are useful for
driving and your safety, comfort and
convenience, are described here.
Controls
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
26
Opening and closing
Remote control
Each remote control contains a rechargeable
battery that is automatically recharged when it
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
driven. Use each remote control at least twice a
year for longer road trips in order to maintain the
batteries' charge status. In cars with Comfort
Access
*, the remote control contains a
replaceable battery, refer to page 35.
The settings called up and implemented when
the car is unlocked depend on which remote
control is used to unlock the car, refer to Per-
sonal Profile, next column.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, refer to
Service data in the remote control, page 227.
Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.
The integrated key fits the following locks:
> Glove compartment, refer to page 114
> Driver's door, refer to page 29
New remote controls
Your BMW center can supply new remote con-
trols with integrated keys as additional units or
as replacements in the event of loss.
Personal Profile
The concept
You can set many of your BMW's functions to
suit your personal needs and preferences.
Without any action on your part, Personal
Profile ensures that most of these settings are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
When you unlock the car, the remote control
used for the purpose is recognized and the
settings stored for it are called up and imple-
mented.
This means that your personal settings will be
activated for you, even if in the meantime your
car was used by someone else with another
remote control and the corresponding settings.
The individual settings are stored for a maxi-
mum of four remote controls. They are stored
for two remote controls if Comfort Access
* is
in use.
Personal Profile settings
For more information on specific settings, refer
to the specified pages.
> Assignment of programmable memory
keys, refer to page 20
> Response of the central locking system
when the car is unlocked, refer to page 27
> Automatic locking of the vehicle, refer to
page 30
> Automatic call-up
* of the driver's seat
position, refer to page 48
> Triple turn signal activation, refer to
page 65
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
27
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> Settings for the display on the Control
Display and in the instrument cluster:
> 12h/24h format of the clock, refer to
page 83
> Date format, refer to page 84
> Brightness of the Control Display, refer
to page 87
> Language on the Control Display, refer
to page 87
> Units of measure, refer to page 80
> Show visual warning for Park Distance
Control PDC
*, refer to page 89
> Light settings:
> Welcome lamps, refer to page 101
> Pathway lighting, refer to page 102
> Daytime running lights, refer to
page 102
> High-beam assistant, refer to page 103
> Automatic climate control: activating/deac-
tivating AUTO program, cooling function
and automatic recirculated-air control, set-
ting temperature, air volume and distribu-
tion, refer to page 107 ff
> Entertainment:
> Tone control, refer to page 154
> Speed-dependent volume control, refer
to page 155
Central locking system
The concept
The central locking system functions when the
driver's door is closed.
The system simultaneously engages and
releases the locks on the following:
> Doors
> Trunk lid
> Fuel filler flap
> Convertible: glove compartment
Operating from outside
> Via the remote control
> Via the door lock
*
> In cars with Comfort Access*, via the
handles on the driver's and front passenger
doors
In addition, if the remote control is used, the
welcome lamps, interior lamps and the door's
courtesy lamps
* are switched on or off. The
alarm system
* is also armed or disarmed.
For further details of the alarm system,
refer to
page 32.
Operating from inside
By means of the button for central locking,
refer to page 30.
In the event of a sufficiently severe accident, the
central locking system unlocks automatically. In
addition, the hazard warning flashers and inte-
rior lamps come on.
Opening and closing:
Using the remote control
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Convertible: to operate the retractable
hardtop with the remote control, the
doors and trunk lid must be closed and the
cargo area partition must be folded down and
engaged on both sides. Refer also to page 39.<
Unlocking
Press the button.
The interior lamps, the courtesy lamps
* and the
welcome lamps come on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
28
Setting unlocking characteristics
You can set whether only the driver's door or
the entire vehicle is to be unlocked when the
button is pressed for the first time.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Unlock button"
4. Select a menu item:
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
entire vehicle.
> "Driver's door only"
Pressing the button once unlocks
the driver's door and fuel filler flap.
Press the button twice to unlock the
entire vehicle.
5. Press the controller.
Coupe: convenient opening
Hold the button down.
The windows and the glass roof
* are opened.
Convertible: convenient opening*
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to open
the retractable hardtop.
Hold the button down.
The windows and the retractable hardtop are
opened if the doors are closed.
If you continue pressing the button, the win-
dows move up.
Watch during the opening process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the opening process.<
Locking
Press the button.
Convertible: convenient closing*
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to
close the retractable hardtop and the windows.
Hold the button down.
The retractable hardtop and the windows are
closed.
Watch during the closing process to
ensure that no one is injured. Releasing
the button interrupts the closing process.<
Switching on interior lamps
While the car is locked:
Press the button.
You can also use this function to locate your
vehicle in parking garages etc.
Unlocking the trunk lid
Press the button for approx. 1 second.
The trunk lid opens a short distance, regardless
of whether it was locked or unlocked.
The trunk lid swings back and up when
opened. Ensure that there is sufficient
clearance. To avoid locking yourself out by
accident, do not place the remote control in the
cargo area. A previously locked trunk lid is
locked again after closing.
Before and after each trip, check that the trunk
lid has not been inadvertently unlocked.<
Convertible: convenient loading*
When you are close to the vehicle, the remote
control for Comfort Access can be used to par-
tially raise the open hardtop for more conve-
nient loading of the cargo area.
1. Briefly press the button and, within one
second, press again and hold until the
retractable hardtop stops in an intermediate
position. The trunk lid opens slightly.
2. Open the trunk lid, press the cargo area
partition upward and stow the cargo in the
cargo area.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
29
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
3. Press down the cargo area partition until it
engages on both sides and close the trunk
lid.
4. Press the button for a longer period to
fold the retractable hardtop back in.
Confirmation signals
You can activate or deactivate the confirmation
signals.
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Flash when lock/unlock"
4. Press the controller.
Flashing when locking/unlocking the
vehicle is switched on.
Malfunctions
The remote control may malfunction due to
local radio waves. If this occurs, unlock and lock
the car at the door lock with the integrated key.
Coupe: in vehicles without an alarm system
* or
Comfort Access
*, only the driver's door can be
locked and unlocked with the integrated key via
the door lock.
Convertible: if hardtop movement via the
remote control is interrupted briefly, the move-
ment will be completed more quickly if you keep
the corresponding button pressed continu-
ously.
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
control, the battery in the remote control is dis-
charged. Use the remote control on an
extended trip to recharge the battery, refer to
page 26. The remote control for Comfort
Access
* contains a battery that may have to be
changed, refer to page 35.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
LX8766S
LX8766E
LX8CAS
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user's authority to operate this equipment.<
Opening and closing:
Using the door lock
You can set the way in which the car is
unlocked, refer to page 27.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
30
Coupe
In vehicles without an alarm system* or
Comfort Access
*, only the driver's door
can be locked via the door lock.<
To lock all doors, the fuel filler flap and the trunk
lid at once:
1. With the doors closed, lock the vehicle
using the button for the central locking
system in the interior, refer to page 30.
2. Unlock and open the driver's or front
passenger door, refer to page 31.
3. Lock the vehicle.
> Lock the driver's door using the inte-
grated key in the door lock, or
> press down the lock button of the front
passenger door and close the door from
the outside.
Convenient operation
Coupe: if the vehicle is equipped with an alarm
system
* or Comfort Access*, you can also
operate the windows and the glass roof
* via the
door lock.
Convertible: you can operate the windows and
the retractable hardtop via the door lock.
Hold the key in the position for unlocking or
locking.
During each closing procedure, and when
opening the retractable hardtop, watch
the process and ensure that no one becomes
trapped. Releasing the key stops the opera-
tion.<
Manual operation
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
lock and unlock the driver's door by turning the
integrated key to the corresponding limit posi-
tions in the door lock.
Opening and closing:
From inside
This button serves to unlock or lock doors and
the trunk lid, but does not activate the anti-theft
system. The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
Automatic locking
You can also set the situations in which the car
locks:
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. Select the desired function:
> "Lock if no door is opened"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle after a short time, unless a door
has been opened.
> "Lock after start. to drive"
The central locking system locks the
vehicle when you drive away.
The function is switched on and is stored
for the remote control currently in use.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
31
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Unlocking and opening doors
> Either unlock the doors together using the
button for the central locking system and
then pull the door handle above the armrest
or
> pull on the door handle of each door twice:
the first time unlocks the door, the second
time opens it.
Locking
> Use the central locking button to lock all of
the doors simultaneously, or
> press down the safety lock button of a door.
To prevent you from being locked out, the
open driver's door cannot be locked using
the lock button.
Persons or animals in a parked vehicle
could lock the doors from the inside. You
should therefore take the remote control with
you when you leave the vehicle so that the latter
can be opened from outside.<
Trunk lid
In order to avoid damage, make sure there
is sufficient clearance before opening the
trunk lid.<
Opening from inside
Press the button: the trunk lid opens unless it
has been locked.
Opening from outside
Press the button, see arrow, or the button
on the remote control for a longer period. The
trunk lid will open slightly. It can now be swung
upwards.
In the event of a malfunction, please con-
tact your BMW center or a workshop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel.<
Coupe: locking or unlocking separately
The switch is located in the glove compartment.
1 Locking the trunk lid
2 Unlocking the trunk lid
Locking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 1.
The trunk lid is locked and cannot be unlocked
using the central locking system.
If you give the remote control without the inte-
grated key to someone else while the glove
compartment is locked, the trunk lid cannot be
opened. This is an advantage when valet park-
ing, for example. Locking the glove compart-
ment, refer to page 114.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
32
Unlocking separately
Push the switch in the direction of arrow 2.
Emergency release
Pull the lever in the cargo area. The trunk lid is
unlocked.
Closing
The handle recesses on the interior trim of the
trunk lid make it easier to pull down.
Make sure that the closing path of the
trunk lid is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.<
Coupe
Convertible
To close the trunk lid, press it down
lightly. The lid is closed automatically.<
Alarm system*
The concept
The vehicle alarm system responds:
> When a door, the hood or the trunk lid is
opened
> To movements inside the vehicle: Interior
motion sensor, refer to page 33
> When the car's inclination changes, for
instance if an attempt is made to jack it up
and steal the wheels or to raise it prior to
towing away
> When there has been an interruption of
power supply from the battery
The alarm system signals unauthorized entry
attempts for a short time by means of:
> An acoustic alarm
> Switching on the hazard warning flashers
> Flashing the high beams
Arming and disarming
When you lock or unlock the vehicle, either with
the remote control or at the door lock, the alarm
system is armed or disarmed at the same time.
You can open the trunk lid even when the alarm
system is armed, by pressing the button on
the remote control, refer to page 28. The lid is
locked and monitored again as soon as you
close it.
Panic mode*
You can trigger the alarm system if you find
yourself in a dangerous situation:
Press the button for at least three seconds.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
Switching off an alarm
> Unlock the car with the remote control,
refer to page 27.
> Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
33
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Indicator lamp displays
> The indicator lamp under the inside rear-
view mirror flashes continuously: the sys-
tem is armed.
> The indicator lamp flashes after locking:
doors, hood or trunk lid are not properly
closed. Even if you do not close the alerted
area, the system begins to monitor the
remaining areas, and the indicator lamp
flashes continuously after approx.
10 seconds. The interior motion sensor and
the tilt alarm sensor are not activated.
> The indicator lamp goes out after unlocking:
your vehicle has not been disturbed while
you were away.
> If the indicator lamp flashes after unlocking
until the remote control is inserted in the
ignition, but for no longer than approx.
5 minutes: your vehicle has been disturbed
while you were away.
Tilt alarm sensor
The tilt of the vehicle is monitored. The alarm
system reacts, e.g. to attempts to steal a wheel
or tow the vehicle.
Interior motion sensor
Coupe
In order for the interior motion sensor to func-
tion properly, the windows and glass roof must
be completely closed
*.
Convertible
The interior of the car is monitored up to the
height of the seat cushions. Thus the alarm sys-
tem is activated together with the interior
motion sensor even if the hardtop is open. The
alarm can be triggered unintentionally by falling
objects such as leaves, refer to Avoiding unin-
tentional alarms.
Avoiding unintentional alarms
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion sensor
may be switched off at the same time. This pre-
vents unintentional alarms, e.g. in the following
situations:
> In duplex garages
> During transport on car-carrying trains,
boats/ships or on a trailer
> When animals are to remain in the vehicle
Switching off tilt alarm sensor and
interior motion sensor
Press the button on the remote control
again as soon as the vehicle is locked.
The indicator lamp lights up briefly and then
flashes continuously. The tilt alarm sensor and
the interior motion sensor are switched off until
the next time the vehicle is unlocked and subse-
quently locked again.
Comfort Access*
Comfort Access enables you to enter your vehi-
cle without needing to hold the remote control
in your hand. All you need to do is wear the
remote control close to your body, e.g. in your
jacket pocket. The vehicle detects the corre-
sponding remote control within the immediate
vicinity or in the passenger compartment.
Comfort Access supports the following func-
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the vehicle
> Unlocking the trunk lid separately
> Engine starting
> Convenient closing
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
34
Functional requirement
> The vehicle or the trunk lid can only be
locked when the vehicle detects that the
remote control currently in use is outside of
the vehicle.
> The vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked
again until after approx. 2 seconds.
> The engine can only be started when the
vehicle detects that the remote control cur-
rently in use is inside the vehicle.
Comparison to the standard remote
control
In general, there is no difference between using
Comfort Access or pressing the buttons on the
remote control to carry out the functions men-
tioned above. You should therefore first famil-
iarize yourself with the instructions on opening
and closing starting on page 26.
Special features regarding the use of Comfort
Access are described below.
If you notice a brief delay while opening or
closing windows, the glass roof or retract-
able hardtop, the system is checking whether a
remote control is inside the vehicle. Please
repeat the opening or closing procedure, if nec-
essary.<
Unlocking
Grasp the handle on the driver's or front pas-
senger door completely, arrow 1. This corre-
sponds to pressing the button.
Locking
Touch the surface, arrow 2, with your finger for
approx. 1 second. This corresponds to pressing
the button.
To preserve the battery, please make
sure that the ignition and all electrical
consumers are switched off before locking the
vehicle.<
Coupe: convenient closing
For Convenient closing, keep your finger on the
surface, arrow 2.
Convertible: window and convertible
top operation
With the ignition at radio readiness or beyond,
you can open and close the windows and the
convertible top when a remote control is
located inside the vehicle.
Unlocking the trunk lid separately
Press the button on the outside of the trunk lid.
This corresponds to pressing the button.
If the vehicle detects that a remote con-
trol has been accidentally left inside the
locked vehicle's cargo area after the trunk lid is
closed, the lid will reopen. The hazard warning
flashers flash and an acoustic signal
* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness
Radio readiness is switched on by pressing the
start/stop button, refer to page 55.
Do not depress the brake or the clutch;
otherwise, the engine will start.<
Starting the engine
You can start the engine or switch on the igni-
tion when a remote control is inside the vehicle.
It is not necessary to insert a remote control into
the ignition lock, refer to page 55.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
35
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching off the engine in cars with
automatic transmission
The engine can only be switched off when the
selector lever is in position P, refer to page 57.
To switch the engine off when the selector lever
is in position N, the remote control must be in
the ignition lock.
Malfunction
Comfort Access may malfunction due to local
radio waves. If this happens, open or close the
vehicle via the buttons on the remote control or
using the integrated key. To start the engine
afterward, insert the remote control into the
ignition lock.
Warning lamps
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when you attempt to
start the engine: the engine cannot
be started. The remote control is not inside the
vehicle or is malfunctioning.
Take the remote control with you inside the
vehicle or have it checked. If necessary, insert
another remote control into the ignition lock.
The warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up while the engine is
running: the remote control is no
longer inside the vehicle. After the engine is
switched off, the engine can only be restarted
within approx. 10 seconds.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on and a message
appears on the Control Display:
replace the battery in the remote control.
Replacing the battery
The remote control for Comfort Access con-
tains a battery that will need to be replaced from
time to time.
1. Take the integrated key out of the remote
control, refer to page 26.
2. Remove the cover.
3. Insert the new battery with the plus side fac-
ing up.
4. Press the cover on to close.
Take the old battery to a battery collec-
tion point or to your BMW center.<
Windows
To prevent injuries, watch the windows
while closing them.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the electric windows and possibly injure them-
selves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
36
Coupe: opening, closing
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch.
Convertible: opening, closing
Individually
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
The window opens as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to stop the opening move-
ment.
You can close the windows in the same manner
by pulling the switch. The rear windows do not
close automatically.
Jointly
> Press the switch to the resistance point:
All windows open as long as you press the
switch.
> Press the switch beyond the resistance
point:
All windows open automatically.
Press the switch again to stop the
opening movement.
> Pull the switch:
All windows close as long as you pull
the switch.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the
windows for approx. 1 minute as long as no
door is opened.
Convenient operation
For information on Convenient operation via the
remote control or the door lock, refer to page 27
or 30. For information on Convenient closing
with Comfort Access, refer to Locking on
page 28.
Pinch protection system
If the closing force exceeds a specific value as a
window closes, the closing action is interrupted
and the window reopens slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the window's travel path
prior to closing it; otherwise, the safety system
might fail to detect certain kinds of obstruc-
tions, such as thin objects, and the window
would continue closing.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
37
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Do not install any accessories that might inter-
fere with window movement. Otherwise, the
pinch protection system could be impaired.
Convertible: the rear windows are not equipped
with pinch protection. Therefore, watch them
closely when closing to avoid personal injury.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, or if ice on the win-
dows, etc., prevents you from closing the win-
dows normally, proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the resistance point and
hold it there. Pinch protection is limited and
the window reopens slightly if the closing
force exceeds a certain value.
2. Pull the switch again past the resistance
point within approx. 4 seconds and hold it
there. The window closes without pinch
protection.
Coupe: glass roof*, electric
To prevent injuries, watch the glass roof
while closing it.
Take the remote control with you when you
leave the car; otherwise, children could operate
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
Raising
Press the switch.
> The closed glass roof is raised and the
sliding visor opens slightly.
Opening, closing
> Press the switch backwards to the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
together as long as you hold the switch in
this position.
> Press the switch backwards past the resis-
tance point.
The glass roof and the sliding visor open
automatically. Briefly press the switch again
to stop the opening movement.
You can close the glass roof in a similar manner
by pressing the switch forwards. The sliding
visor remains open and can be closed by hand.
For information on Convenient operation via the
remote control or door lock, refer to page 27
or 30.
After switching off the ignition
When the remote control is removed or the igni-
tion is switched off, you can still operate the roof
for approx. 1 minute as long as no door has
been opened.
Pinch protection system
If the glass roof encounters an obstruction dur-
ing closing from approximately the middle of
the opening in the roof, or during closing from
the raised position, the closing movement is
interrupted and the glass roof is opened again
slightly.
Despite the pinch protection system
check and clear the roof's travel path prior
to closing it; otherwise, the safety system might
fail to detect certain kinds of obstructions, such
as very thin objects, and the roof would con-
tinue closing.<
Closing without pinch protection
If there is an external danger, press the switch
forward past the resistance point. The roof
closes without pinch protection.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
38
Following interruptions in electrical
power supply
After a power failure, there is a possibility that
the glass roof can only be raised. The system
must be initialized. BMW recommends having
this work done by your BMW center.
Closing manually*
In the event of an electrical malfunction, you can
move the glass roof manually:
1. Unclip the front of the cover of the interior
lamps using the screwdriver from the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 233.
2. Insert the screwdriver into the openings on
each side to press the clips.
3. Remove the control unit.
4. Unplug the motor. Considerably less effort
will be required for manual operation.
5. Insert the Allen wrench
* supplied with the
onboard vehicle tool kit, refer to page 233,
into the opening provided. Move the glass
roof in the desired direction.
6. Reinstall the control unit and reattach the
lamp cover.
Convertible: retractable
hardtop
The retractable hardtop combines reliable
weather protection with simple and convenient
operation.
The following tips will enhance your driving
pleasure in your Convertible:
> It is advisable that you close the retractable
hardtop when you park the vehicle. Not only
does the closed hardtop protect the vehicle
interior against unanticipated weather dam-
age, it also offers theft protection. However,
even when the hardtop is closed, valuables
should only be stored in the locked cargo
area.
> Do not attach roof rack systems to the
retractable hardtop, and in particular do not
attach magnetic racks.
> Do not attach rack systems to the trunk lid,
and in particular do not attach magnetic
racks.
> When the retractable hardtop is operated,
the trunk lid swings back and up. Before
operating the retractable hardtop, ensure
that there is enough clearance, e.g. when
parked in front of a wall.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
39
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> If you open the hardtop while it is wet, e.g.
after driving in the rain, water may drip into
the cargo area. If necessary, remove items
from the cargo area beforehand to avoid
water stains or soiling.
Do not place any objects on the retract-
able hardtop or on the trunk lid; other-
wise, they could fall during movements of the
retractable hardtop and cause damage or injury.
Never move the retractable hardtop when the
rollover protection system is in the activated
position.
Driving when the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed may result in damage or injury.
Do not reach into the mechanism during the
opening or closing procedure. Keep children
away from the swiveling area of the retractable
hardtop.<
The retractable hardtop cannot be moved
at temperatures below +147/–106. A
message appears on the Control Display.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened and closed when the vehicle is
stationary. To avoid causing damage, do not
drive off until the hardtop has stopped mov-
ing.<
Before opening and closing
> Comply with the safety precautions
described above.
> Ensure that the cargo area partition is
folded down and engaged on both sides,
refer to page 119; otherwise, it will not be
possible to open the retractable hardtop.
> Do not place any objects next to or on the
cargo area partition and close the storage
compartment on the left side of the cargo
area.
> Do not exceed the maximum loading height
under the cargo area partition; refer to the
label in the cargo area showing a line indi-
cating the maximum height.
> Ensure that the trunk lid is closed.
> The vehicle should be parked on fairly
level ground. Excessive angle is indicated
by a lamp.
Opening and closing
When the vehicle is stationary and at radio
readiness or beyond, refer to page 55:
If possible, conserve the battery by only
operating the retractable hardtop when
the engine is running.
Before closing the retractable hardtop, remove
all foreign objects from the windshield frame as
these could prevent the hardtop from closing
properly.<
1 Push button: open the retractable hardtop.
Pull button: close the retractable hardtop.
2 LEDs
The side windows move down when the
switch for hardtop operation is pulled or
pushed.<
LEDs
In the following situations, a message appears
on the Control Display or an acoustic signal
sounds in addition to the LED lighting up:
> While the hardtop is being operated, the left
LED lights up green. It goes out as soon as
the top is fully opened or closed.
> If the right-hand LED flashes red when you
release the switch, the opening or closing
action has not yet finished.
> If the right LED lights up red when the
switch is pressed, the cargo area partition is
folded up, the trunk lid is not closed, the
vehicle is standing on a strong incline or
there is a malfunction. The retractable hard-
top cannot be moved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Opening and closing
40
Interruption
The automatic sequence of movements is
interrupted if the switch for hardtop operation is
released. The sequence can be continued in
the desired direction by pushing or pulling the
switch.
A hardtop that is not fully opened or
closed is a safety hazard.
Do not interrupt and resume the closing proce-
dure several times in close succession as this
could damage the mechanism.<
If the hardtop is not fully opened or
closed, the trunk lid cannot be opened
and the windows cannot be moved.<
Convenient operation with remote
control or via door lock
Refer to pages 28 and 30.
Wind deflector*
The wind deflector keeps air movements in the
passenger compartment to a minimum when
the hardtop is open and provides an even more
comfortable ride, particularly at high speeds.
Installation
The wind deflector is stored in a protective
cover in the cargo area. Brief instructions for
operation can be found on the protective cover.
1. Remove the wind deflector from the protec-
tive cover and unfold it, arrows 1.
2. Press together the top and bottom parts of
the wind deflector until the catch engages,
arrow 2.
3. Push the fastening pin, arrow 3, into the
opening provided on the right side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place. Remove the
protective caps beforehand, if necessary.
4. Push the fastening pin, arrow 4, into the
opening provided on the left side of the
vehicle until it snaps into place.
5. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 5 as far as the first stop to insert the
right fastening pin into the holders.
6. Turn the rotary handle in the direction of
arrow 6 as far as the symbol to insert the
left fastening pin into the holders.
7. Fold up the top section of the wind deflec-
tor.
With the wind deflector installed: do not
recline the front-seat backrests too far if
the seat is to be slid all the way back, as this
would damage the wind deflector.<
Only turn the rotary handle within the
range between the two symbols; other-
wise, the cable system inside the wind deflector
could be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
41
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Removing the wind deflector
Proceed in the reverse order as used for instal-
lation.
Protective caps are provided in the vehicle for
the holders of the wind deflector.
Folding
Slide the red release lever towards the middle of
the wind deflector and push the two halves
apart.
Loading function
Cargo can still be loaded on the rear seat of the
vehicle even if the wind deflector has been
installed.
1. Lower all windows.
2. Fold down the top section of the wind
deflector, arrow 1.
3. Turn the rotary handle to position ,
arrow 2.
Fold both sections of the wind deflector forward
and rest them against the front seats, arrow 3.
To protect the seat cushions or to use the bag
holders, you can fold the rear backrest down,
refer to page 119.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Adjustments
42
Adjustments
Sitting safely
The ideal sitting position can make a vital con-
tribution to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. In con-
junction with the safety belts, the head
restraints and the airbags, the seated position
has a major influence on your safety in the event
of an accident. To ensure that the safety sys-
tems operate with optimal efficiency, we
strongly urge you to observe the instructions
contained in the following section.
For additional information on transporting chil-
dren safely, refer to page 52.
Airbags
Always maintain an adequate distance
between yourself and the airbags. Always
grip the steering wheel on the rim, with your
hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions,
to minimize the risk of injury to the hands or
arms in the event of the airbag being triggered
off.
No one and nothing should come between the
airbags and the seat occupant.
Do not use the cover of the front airbag on the
front passenger side as a storage area. Make
sure that the front passenger is sitting correctly,
e.g. not resting feet or legs on the dashboard;
otherwise, leg injuries can occur if the front air-
bag deploys.
Make sure that passengers keep their heads
away from the side airbag and do not lean
against the cover of the head airbag; otherwise,
serious injuries can result if the airbag
deploys.<
Even if you follow all the instructions, injuries
resulting from contact with airbags cannot be
fully excluded, depending on the circum-
stances. The ignition and inflation noise may
provoke a mild hearing loss in extremely sensi-
tive individuals. This effect is usually only tem-
porary.
For airbag locations and additional information
on airbags, refer to page 98.
Head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level.
Otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of an accident.<
Head restraints, refer to page 45.
Safety belt
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Your vehicle has four seats, each of which is
equipped with a safety belt.
Never allow more than one person to
wear a single safety belt. Never allow
infants or small children to ride in a passenger's
lap. Make sure that the belt in the lap area sits
low across the hips and does not press against
the abdomen.
The safety belt must not rest against the throat,
run across sharp edges, pass over hard or frag-
ile objects or be pinched. Fasten the safety belt
so that it sits as snugly as possible against the
lap and shoulder without being twisted. Other-
wise, the belt could slide over your hips and
injure your abdomen in the event of a frontal
collision.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing and regularly pull
the belt in the upper-body area taut; otherwise,
its restraining effect could be impaired.<
Safety belts, refer to page 49.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
43
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seats
Note before adjusting
Never attempt to adjust your seat while
the vehicle is moving. The seat could
respond with unexpected movement, and the
ensuing loss of vehicle control could lead to an
accident.
On the front passenger seat as well, do not
incline the backrest too far to the rear while the
vehicle is being driven; otherwise, there is a
danger in the event of an accident of sliding
under the safety belt, eliminating the protection
normally provided by the belt.<
Comply with the instructions on head restraint
height on page 45, and on damaged safety
belts on page 49.
Manual adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Longitudinal direction
Pull lever 1 and slide the seat to the desired
position.
After releasing the lever, move the seat gently
forward or back to make sure it engages prop-
erly.
Height
Pull lever 2 and apply your weight to the seat or
lift it off, as necessary.
Backrest
Pull lever 3 and apply your weight to the back-
rest or lift it off, as necessary.
Tilt*
Pull the lever and apply your weight to the seat
or lift it off, as necessary.
Thigh support*
Pull the lever and move the thigh support
forward or back.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Adjustments
44
Electrical adjustment
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
1 Longitudinal direction
2 Height
3 Angle
4 Backrest
5 Convertible: head restraints
Coupe: the head restraints are adjusted manu-
ally, refer to Head restraints below.
Lumbar support*
You can also adjust the contour of the backrest
to obtain additional support in the lumbar
region.
The upper hips and spinal column receive
supplementary support to help you maintain
a relaxed, upright sitting position.
> Increase or decrease curvature: press the
switch at the front or rear, respectively.
> Shift curvature up or down: press the switch
at the top or bottom, respectively.
Backrest width*
You can change the width of the backrest to suit
your individual preferences by adjusting the lat-
eral-support pads.
Press the front or rear end of the switch.
Backrest width decreases or increases accord-
ingly.
Longitudinal adjustment from outside/
behind*
To move the front seats forward or backward
from outside or from one of the rear seats: with
the door open, press the front end 1 or rear end
2 of the switch.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
45
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Head restraints
Correctly adjusted head restraint
A correctly adjusted head restraint reduces the
risk of neck injury in the event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its center is at approx. ear level. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident. Only remove a head
restraint if no one will be sitting on the seat in
question. Reinstall the head restraint before
transporting anyone on that seat. Otherwise,
the passenger will be without protection from
the head restraint.<
Height
Adjust the head restraint so that its center is
approximately at ear level.
Distance
Adjust the distance so that the head restraint is
as close as possible to the back of the head.
Front active head restraints
In a rear collision of a sufficient strength, the
active head restraint reduces the distance to
the head.
Do not use seat or head restraint covers
that could impair the function of the active
head restraint. Otherwise, the protective func-
tion of the active head restraint will not be
ensured and its full potential in reducing the risk
of injury in the event of a rear collision may not
be realized.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the active head restraints, have the
testing, repair and removal executed only by a
BMW center or a workshop that works accord-
ing to repair procedures of BMW with corre-
spondingly trained personnel and that has the
required explosives licenses. Unprofessional
attempts to work on the system could lead to
failure in an emergency or to undesired airbag
activation, either of which could result in per-
sonal injury.<
For technical reasons, the head restraint
cannot be removed.<
Coupe: front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1,
and slide the head restraint down.
Convertible: front seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: press the button upward.
> To lower: press the button downward.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Adjustments
46
Adjusting the distance to the back of
the head
> Forward: pull up.
> Back: press the button and push the head
cushion toward the rear.
Do not insert objects behind the head
cushion; otherwise, the head restraint
may not function properly.<
Coupe: rear seats
Height adjustment
> To raise: pull up.
> To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
slide the head restraint down.
Removing
1. Pull up as far as it will go.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, tilt the rear seat
backrest slightly forward and pull the head
restraint all the way out.
Only remove the head restraints if no pas-
sengers will be sitting in the rear. Reinstall
head restraints before transporting passengers
in the rear.<
Entering the rear seats
Coupe: seat with manual longitudinal
adjustment
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull the lever and swing the backrest for-
ward.
2. Push the seat forward.
Previous position
Push the seat backward and swing the backrest
back.
When pushing the seat into its rearmost
position, make sure that no one is injured
and that no objects are damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
47
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Seat with electrical longitudinal
adjustment
Coupe
Convertible
Seat backrest warning lamp:
Comes on when a seat backrest is not
engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the Control Display.
Easy entry
The easy entry feature includes a memory func-
tion for the longitudinal adjustment and back-
rest angle.
1. Pull lever 1 and swing the backrest forward.
2. Press the front end 2 of the switch until the
seat has moved into the desired position.
Previous position
Press the rear end 3 of the switch until the seat
automatically stops in its previous position, and
fold the backrest back. If you release the switch
before the previous seat position is reached,
the seat will stop at its current position.
When sliding the seat backward, make
sure no one is injured and no objects are
damaged.
Before driving off, engage both seats and back-
rests so that they are locked in place. Other-
wise, there is a risk of an accident due to unex-
pected movement.<
Heated seats*
Press the button once per temperature level.
Three LEDs indicate the highest temperature.
To switch off:
Press button longer.
If you continue driving within approx. the next
15 minutes, the seat heating is automatically
activated at the previously set temperature.
The temperature is lowered or the heating is
switched off entirely to save on battery power.
The LEDs stay lit.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Adjustments
48
Seat and mirror memory*
You can store and call up two different combi-
nations of driver's seat and exterior mirror
positions.
Settings for the backrest width and lumbar
support are not stored in memory.
Storing
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,
refer to page 55.
2. Adjust the seat and exterior mirrors to the
desired positions.
3. Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up.
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2:
the LED goes out.
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tions are stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Call-up
Do not call up the memory while you are
driving; otherwise, unexpected seat
movement could result in an accident.<
Comfort function
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness, refer to page 55.
2. Briefly press the desired memory button 1
or 2.
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Safety feature
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off, refer to page 55.
2. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2
and keep it pressed until the adjustment
process has been completed.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Call-up with the remote control
The driver's seat position last set is stored for
the remote control currently in use.
You can select whether or not the seat is reset
to that position automatically.
When this Personal Profile function is
used, first make sure that the footwell
behind the driver's seat is free of obstacles.
Failure to do so could cause injury to persons or
damage to objects as a result of a rearward
movement of the seat.<
The adjusting procedure is halted immediately
when you touch a seat adjustment switch or
one of the memory buttons.
Selecting automatic call-up
1. "Settings"
2. "Door locks"
3. "Last seat position auto."
The function for automatically calling up
the last seat position is switched on and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Switching off automatic call-up
Deactivate "Last seat position automatic".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
49
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Safety belts
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 43 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
Before every drive, make sure that all occupants
wear their safety belts. Airbags complement the
safety belt as an additional safety device, but
they do not represent a substitute.
Closing
Make sure you hear the latch plate engage in
the belt buckle.
The upper belt anchor is suitable for adults of
any stature as long as the seat is adjusted prop-
erly, refer to page 43.
Opening
1. Grasp the belt firmly.
2. Press the red button in the buckle.
3. Guide the belt into its reel.
"Fasten safety belts" reminder for
driver's and front passenger seat
The indicator lamps light up and an
acoustic signal sounds. In addition,
a message appears on the Control
Display. Check whether the safety
belt has been fastened correctly.
The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is issued as
long as the driver's safety belt has not been fas-
tened. The "Fasten safety belts" reminder is
also activated at road speeds above approx.
5 mph or 8 km/h if the front passenger safety
belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on the
front passenger seat, or if driver or front pas-
senger unfasten their safety belts.
Damage to safety belts
If the safety belts are damaged or
stressed in an accident: have the belt sys-
tem, including any belt tensioners or child
restraint systems, replaced and the belt
anchors checked. Have this work done only by
your BMW center or at a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, it is
not guaranteed that the safety devices will func-
tion properly.<
Coupe: belt hand-over
The concept
The belt hand-over makes it easier for you to
fasten your safety belt. When you close the
door and switch on radio readiness or the igni-
tion, the belt hand-over extends automatically
and presents the in a position that is convenient
for fastening it around you. After you have fas-
tened your safety belt, the belt hand-over
retracts to its original position.
Even if you have not yet fastened your safety
belt, the belt hand-over will retract if you:
> Wait for more than approx. one minute
> Open the corresponding door
> Start driving.
Closing the respective door reactivates the belt
hand-over if the ignition or radio readiness is on.
Front passenger seat
The belt hand-over will extend only if the seat is
occupied and after the front passenger door is
closed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Adjustments
50
Pinch protection system
If the belt hand-over encounters resistance on
moving in or out, it moves back slightly in the
opposite direction and stops in this position. To
reactivate the belt hand-over: open and close
the door or switch the ignition off and on.
Although there is a pinch protection sys-
tem, always check that the maneuvering
area of the belt hand-over is clear. Otherwise it
cannot be ensured that the system will stop
moving in certain extreme situations.<
Mirrors
Exterior mirrors
The front passenger's mirror is more con-
vex than the driver's mirror. The objects
seen in the mirror are closer than they appear.
Do not gauge your distance from traffic behind
you on the basis of what you see in the mirror;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of an acci-
dent.<
1 Adjustments
2 Switching to the other mirror or automatic
curb monitor
*
3 Folding mirrors in and out*
The setting for the exterior mirrors is stored for
the remote control currently in use
*. The stored
position is called up automatically when the
vehicle is unlocked.
Manual adjustment
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually:
press the edge of the glass.
Folding mirrors in and out*
At driving speeds up to approx.
12 mph/20 km/h, you can fold the mirrors in and
out by pressing button 3. This can be beneficial
in narrow streets, for example, or for moving
mirrors that were folded in by hand back out into
their correct positions. Mirrors that were folded
in are folded out automatically at a speed of
approx. 25 mph/40 km/h.
Before entering an automatic car wash,
fold in the exterior mirrors manually or
with button 3 to prevent them from being dam-
aged, depending on the width of the vehicle.<
Automatic heating
Depending on the outside temperature, both
exterior mirrors are heated automatically when
the engine is running or the ignition is switched
on.
Passenger side mirror tilt function –
automatic curb monitor*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
driver's side mirror, arrow 1.
2. Shift into reverse or engage the selector
lever- or transmission position R.
The glass of the mirror on the passenger
side tilts slightly down. This allows the
driver to see the area immediately adjacent
to the vehicle, e.g. a curb, when backing into
a parking space.
Deactivating
Push the switch to the position for the passen-
ger side mirror, arrow 2.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
51
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Interior rearview mirror
Turn the knob to reduce glare from the head-
lamps of cars behind you when driving at night.
Interior and exterior mirrors, automatic
dimming feature*
The automatic dimming feature of the interior
and exterior mirrors
* is controlled by two photo
cells in the interior rearview mirror. One photo
cell is in the mirror frame, see arrow; the other is
on the back of the mirror.
In order to ensure that the system functions
correctly, keep the photo cells clean, do not
cover the area between the interior rearview
mirror and windshield, and do not affix adhesive
labels or stickers of any kind to the windshield
directly in front of the mirror.
Steering wheel
Adjustments
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion; otherwise, there
is a risk of an accident due to unexpected move-
ment.<
1. Fold the lever down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
tion.
3. Swing the lever back up.
Do not use force to swing the lever
back up; otherwise, the mechanism
will be damaged.<
Steering wheel heating*
Press the button.
The LED in the button lights up when the
steering wheel heating is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
52
Transporting children safely
The right place for children
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle; otherwise, they could endanger
themselves and/or other persons by opening
the doors, for example.<
Children always in the rear
Accident research has shown that the safest
place for children is on the rear seat.
Children under the age of 13 or smaller
than 5 ft/150 cm may be transported only
in the rear in suitable child restraint systems
appropriate for their age, weight and size. Oth-
erwise, there is an increased risk of injury in the
event of an accident.<
Children 13 years of age or older must be buck-
led in with a safety belt as soon as there no
longer is any child restraint system that is
appropriate for their age, size and weight.
Children in the front passenger seat
Should it be necessary to use a child
restraint system on the front passenger
seat, the front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger must be deactivated. Otherwise, a child
traveling on that seat will face a significant risk
of injury if the airbags are triggered off, even
with a child restraint system.<
For more information on automatic deactivation
of the front passenger airbags refer to page 98.
Installing child restraint
systems
Observe the child restraint system manu-
facturer's instructions when selecting,
installing and using child restraint systems.
Otherwise, the protective effect may be dimin-
ished. <
Standard child restraint systems are designed
to be secured with a lap belt or with the lap-belt
section of a lap-and-shoulder belt. Incorrectly
or improperly installed child restraint systems
can increase the risk of injury to children.
Always follow the installation instructions for
the system with the greatest care.
On the front passenger seat
After installing a child restraint system on
the front passenger seat, make sure that
the front and side airbags for the front passen-
ger are deactivated; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of injury if the airbags deploy.<
Seat position
Before installing a child restraint system, move
the front passenger seat as far back and up as
possible to obtain the best possible position for
the belt. Do not change the seat position after
this.
Backrest width*
The backrest width of the front passenger
seat must be at its widest possible set-
ting. Do not change the setting after installing
the child seat. Otherwise, the child seat's stabil-
ity on the front passenger seat is limited.<
1. Adjust the backrest width to its widest
setting, refer to page 44.
2. Install the child seat.
Child seat security
The rear safety belts and the front passenger
safety belt can be prevented from being pulled
out in order to fasten child restraint systems.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
53
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
To lock the safety belt
1. Secure the child restraint system with the
belt.
2. Pull the belt strap all the way out.
3. Allow the belt strap to retract and pull it taut
against the child restraint system.
The safety belt is locked.
To unlock the safety belt
1. Open the belt buckle.
2. Remove the child restraint system.
3. Allow the safety belt strap to retract all the
way.
LATCH child restraint fixing
system
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHil-
dren.
To install and use the LATCH child
restraint system, follow the operating and
safety instructions provided by the manufac-
turer of the system; otherwise, the protective
function of the seat may be compromised.<
Mounts for the lower LATCH anchors
Before installing the child seat, pull the belt out
of the area for the child restraint fixing system.
Ensure that both lower LATCH anchors
are correctly engaged and that the child
restraint system is resting firmly against the
backrest; otherwise, the protective function of
the seat may be compromised.<
The anchor points for the lower LATCH
anchors are located behind the labeled protec-
tive caps.
Upper LATCH retaining strap
Convertible
For Canadian Customers Only.
The following statement is required by Trans-
port Canada.
This vehicle is not equipped with user-ready
tether anchorages. As such neither a child
restraint system, nor a booster cushion, requir-
ing the use of a tether strap can be properly
secured in the vehicle.
Coupe
Use the top tether anchors to secure child
restraint systems only; otherwise, the
anchors could be damaged.<
For child restraint systems with tether straps
there are two additional anchors, see arrows.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Transporting children safely
54
Placement of the tether strap
Coupe
Make sure the upper retaining strap does
not run over sharp edges and is not
twisted as it passes to the top anchor. Other-
wise, the strap will not properly secure the child
restraint system in the event of an accident.<
1 Direction of travel
2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
5 Rear window shelf
6 Seat backrest
7 Upper retaining strap of child restraint
system
If necessary, fold the anchors upward before
use.
1. Push the head restraint upward.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint holders.
3. Use the hook to clip the retaining strap to
the anchor.
4. Push the head restraint into its lowermost
position.
5. Pull the retaining strap taut.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
55
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Driving
Ignition lock
Insert the remote control into the
ignition lock
Insert the remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
> Radio readiness is switched on.
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
Comfort Access*
If the car is equipped with Comfort Access, only
insert the remote control into the ignition lock
under special circumstances, refer to page 33.
Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock
Do not forcibly pull the remote control out
of the ignition lock as this may cause
damage.<
Before removing the remote control, push it all
the way in to release the locking mechanism.
> The ignition is switched off if it was on.
Automatic transmission
You cannot take out the remote control unless
the selector lever is in the P position: interlock.
Start/stop button
Pressing the start/stop button switches radio
readiness or the ignition on or off.
Manual transmission: when you press the
start/stop button and depress the clutch,
the engine starts.
Automatic transmission and Sports automatic
transmission with double clutch: when you
press the start/stop button and depress the
brake pedal, the engine starts.<
Radio readiness
Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played in the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> In cars with Comfort Access
*, by touching
the surface above the door lock, refer to
Locking on page 34
Ignition on
All electrical consumers can operate. The
odometer and trip odometer are displayed in
the instrument cluster.
When the engine is off, please switch
off the ignition and any unnecessary
electrical consumers in order to preserve the
battery.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
56
Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lamps as well as dis-
plays in the instrument cluster go out.
Starting the engine
Do not run the engine in enclosed areas;
otherwise, the inhalation of toxic exhaust
gases can cause loss of consciousness and
death. The exhaust gases contain carbon mon-
oxide, an odorless and colorless, but highly
toxic gas. Never leave an unattended vehicle
with the engine running; otherwise, such a vehi-
cle represents a potential safety hazard.
Before leaving the vehicle with the engine run-
ning, always shift into neutral or selector lever /
transmission position P and apply the parking
brake forcefully to prevent the vehicle from roll-
ing.<
Avoid frequent starting in quick succes-
sion as well as repeated start attempts in
which the engine does not start. Otherwise, the
fuel is not burned or incompletely burned and
there is a danger of overheating and damaging
the catalytic converter.<
Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the
vehicle remains stationary. Start driving right
away, but at moderate engine speeds.
Manual transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Depress the clutch and shift to neutral posi-
tion.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Automatic transmission
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Move the selector lever to position P.
3. Press the start/stop button.
The starter operates automatically for a certain
time, and stops automatically as soon as the
engine has started.
Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
Remote control in the ignition lock or, with
Comfort Access, inside the vehicle, refer to
page 33.
1. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button.
The engine starts independent of the current
transmission position.
Switching off the engine
Always take the remote control with you
when you leave the vehicle.
When parking, apply the parking brake force-
fully; otherwise, the vehicle could begin to roll.<
Manual transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock, refer to page 55.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
57
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic transmission
1. With the car at a standstill, move the
selector lever to position P.
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
4. Removing the remote control from the
ignition lock, refer to page 55.
Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
1. With the car at a standstill, press the start/
stop button.
If the transmission is shifted into N when the
engine is switched off, you will be notified
visually and acoustically of this fact.
2. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
3. Remove remote control from the ignition
lock, refer to page 55. The transmission is
automatically shifted into transmission
position P.
Parking brake
The parking brake is primarily intended to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling while parked; it
brakes the rear wheels.
Indicator lamp
The indicator lamp is lit, and when you
drive off an acoustic signal sounds in
addition. The parking brake is still
applied.
Indicator lamp for Canadian models.
Applying
The lever locks in position automatically.
Releasing
Pull slightly upwards, press the button and
lower the lever.
In exceptional cases, if the parking brake
has to be used to slow or stop the car, do
not pull the lever up too hard. In doing so, con-
tinuously press the button of the parking brake
lever.
Otherwise, excessive force on the parking
brake can lock up the rear wheels and cause the
rear of the car to swerve.<
To prevent corrosion and one-sided brak-
ing action, occasionally apply the parking
brake lightly when the vehicle is slowly coming
to a stop if the traffic conditions are suitable.
The brake lamps do not light up when the park-
ing brake is applied.<
Manual transmission
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, press
the gearshift lever to the right. Otherwise,
the engine could be damaged if you inadvert-
ently shift into 3rd or 4th gear.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
58
Reverse gear
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
When the gearshift lever is pressed to the left,
a slight resistance has to be overcome.
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic*
In addition to fully automatic operation, you can
also manually shift with the Steptronic, refer to
page 59.
Vehicle parking
To prevent the vehicle from rolling,
always select position P and apply the
parking brake before leaving the vehicle with
the engine running.<
Disengaging the remote control
In order to remove the remote control from the
ignition lock, you must first move the selector
lever to position P and switch off the engine:
interlock. Removing the remote control from
the ignition lock, refer to page 55.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position is displayed and, in
manual mode, the engaged gear, e.g. M4.
Changing selector lever positions
> With the ignition switched on or the engine
running, the selector lever can be moved
out of position P.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the selector lever will
refuse to move: shiftlock.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping
after you select a driving position,
depress the brake until you are ready to
start.<
A lock prevents you from inadvertently engag-
ing selector lever positions R and P. To cancel
the lock, press the button on the front of the
selector lever, see arrow.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
D Drive, automatic position
Position for normal vehicle operation. All for-
ward gears are selected automatically.
Under normal operating conditions, fuel con-
sumption is lowest when you are driving in posi-
tion D.
Kickdown
Kickdown enables you to achieve maximum
performance.
Press the accelerator pedal beyond the full-
throttle resistance point.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
59
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Sport program and manual
operation M/S
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot; the Sport program
is activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
DS is displayed in the instrument cluster.
To deactivate the sport program or manual
mode M/S, move the selector lever to the right
into position D.
Shifting gears via the selector lever
Move selector lever from position D toward the
left into the M/S shifting slot:
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Shifting gears via shift paddles* on the
steering wheel
The shift paddles allow you to shift gears
quickly since both hands can remain on the
steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode.
If the selector lever is in the M/S gear
plane, manual mode remains active.<
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combination
of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for example,
a downshift that would cause the engine to
overrev will not be executed by the system.
The gear selected is briefly displayed in the
instrument cluster, followed again by the gear
actually in use.
Overriding selector lever lock
Should the selector lever refuse to move out of
position P even though the ignition is switched
on, the brake is depressed and the button on
the selector lever is pressed, the selector lever
lock can be overridden:
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
60
3. Using the screwdriver from the onboard
vehicle tool kit, refer to page 233, press the
red lever while moving the selector lever to
the desired position.
7-gear Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch*
The concept
The 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch is an automated manual trans-
mission with two clutches and secondary gear
sets in which the clutching and shifting is han-
dled by an electrohydraulic system.
With the 7-gear Sports automatic transmission
with double clutch, the gears are shifted without
an interruption in driving power.
You operate the 7-gear Sports automatic trans-
mission with double clutch using the selector
lever and two shift paddles on the steering
wheel.
It offers you the following functions:
> either manual or automatic mode: sequen-
tial mode or drive mode
> automatic downshifting and protection
against incorrect gear selection, even in
sequential mode
> Launch Control, refer to page 64
> Automatic throttle blip
System limitations
The 7-gear Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch has an overheating protection
that protects the clutch from extreme loads.
The indicator lamp lights up in yellow if
the transmission becomes too warm.
Avoid high engine loads and frequent
accelerations from zero. If the transmission is
overheated, the indicator lamp lights up in red
and the power flow to the motor is interrupted.
It is only possible to continue driving once the
transmission has cooled down.
Avoid frequent powerful accelerations from
zero and do not hold the vehicle on inclines by
pressing lightly on the accelerator while letting
the clutch slip, as this may cause the transmis-
sion to overheat.
Selector lever positions
P R N D M/S + –
Displays in the instrument cluster
The selector lever position and the engaged
gear are displayed, e.g. M4.
Engaging selector lever positions
> The selector lever can be moved out of
position P only with the engine running:
interlock.
> Before moving the lever away from P or N
with the vehicle stationary, first depress the
brake; otherwise, the desired shift will not
be executed: shiftlock.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
61
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Shifting into N, D, R
Briefly push the selector lever in the desired
direction, overcoming a resistance point if nec-
essary. When shifting out of P or into R, simul-
taneously press the button 1.
The engaged selector lever position is also dis-
played on the selector lever.
When you release the selector lever, it returns
to its center position.
Shifting into P
Press the button P.
P Park
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
The rear wheels are locked.
The transmission is shifted into P if, with
the engine running, you open the driver's
door, do not have your safety belt fastened, and
subsequently actuate neither the brake pedal
nor the accelerator.<
The transmission is shifted into P as soon
as you switch off the engine, unless the
transmission is in N and the remote control is in
the ignition lock, refer to page 230. As soon as
you remove the remote control from the ignition
lock, then the transmission is shifted into P.<
R Reverse
Select this only when the vehicle is stationary.
N Neutral
You can select this in a car wash, for example.
The vehicle can roll.
After the engine is switched off, the trans-
mission remains in N if you leave the
remote control in the ignition lock. You can use
this function at a car wash, for example, refer to
page 230.<
D Drive mode
In Drive mode, all forward gears are shifted
automatically.
Kickdown
For sudden acceleration maneuvers such as
passing, depress the accelerator past the resis-
tance point. This provides maximum accelera-
tion.
Sport program and manual operation
M/S
Push selector lever toward the left from the
selector lever position D, the Sport program is
activated. This position is recommended for a
performance-oriented driving style.
The engaged gear, e.g. S1, is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
When you press the selector lever forwards or
backwards, the manual mode is activated and
Steptronic changes gear.
The engaged gear, e.g. M1 is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
62
In the following situations, the 7-gear Sports
automatic transmission with double clutch
does the thinking for you:
> Upshifts and downshifts are executed only
when they will result in a plausible combina-
tion of engine and vehicle speed; thus, for
example, a downshift that could cause the
engine to overrev will not be executed by
the system.
> At a stop, the transmission is automatically
shifted down to the first gear.
> Shortly before the speed falls below a gear-
dependent minimum speed, the transmis-
sion automatically downshifts without your
intervention.
Quick downshifting: Even in sequential mode,
you can skip over several gears in order to
achieve an optimum acceleration. To do so,
depress the accelerator past the resistance
point.
To return to automatic mode, push the selector
lever to the right.
Gear shifting
Upshift or downshift using the selector lever or
the shift paddles. You do not need to lift your
foot off the accelerator when doing so.
Using the selector lever
> To upshift, pull the selector lever toward the
rear.
> To downshift, push it toward the front.
Using the shift paddles on the steering
wheel
You can also shift manually using two shift pad-
dles on the steering wheel. The shift paddles
allow you to shift gears quickly since both
hands can remain on the steering wheel.
> When you use the shift paddles on the
steering wheel to shift gears in automatic
mode, the transmission switches to manual
mode.
> If you do not accelerate or shift gears using
the shift paddles for a certain amount of
time, the transmission switches back to
automatic mode if the selector lever is in
position D.
> To upshift, briefly pull the right shift
paddle +.
> To downshift, briefly pull the left shift pad-
dle –.
Driving dynamics control
The driving dynamics control permits you, at
the push of a button, to have your BMW react in
an even more sporty fashion when driving:
> Optimal use is made of the engine's speed
range.
> Gear changes occur more quickly.
> The engine reacts more spontaneously to
accelerator pedal movements.
Activating the system
Press the SPORT button.
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
appears in the info display.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
63
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Deactivating the system
> Press the SPORT button again
> Switching off the engine
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT
appears in the info display.
Manually unlocking parking lock
In the event of a power supply interrup-
tion such as a discharged or discon-
nected battery or an electrical malfunction, the
parking lock must be manually unlocked; other-
wise, the rear wheels are immobilized and the
vehicle cannot be towed.<
Only unlock the parking lock manually for tow-
ing and make sure to set the parking brake
forcefully beforehand so that the vehicle cannot
roll. Lock the parking lock again after the vehicle
is parked.
Releasing
1. Unclip the sleeve of the selector lever.
2. Pull the sleeve up over the selector lever
until the sleeve is inside out.
3. Using the allen wrench from the toolkit,
refer to page 233, rotate the cover until it
reaches the stop, arrow 1, and remove,
arrow 2.
4. Insert allen wrench into the opening,
arrow 1.
5. Rotate allen wrench until it reaches the
stop, arrow 2. The parking lock is unlocked.
Do not turn allen wrench in the oppo-
site direction; otherwise, you may
damage the mechanism.<
6. Remove allen wrench from the opening.
After parking the vehicle, lock the parking
lock again. Otherwise, there is a danger
that the vehicle will roll.<
Locking
1. Press the button, see arrow.
The parking lock is locked again.
2. Replace cover again.
3. Clip the selector lever sleeve back into
place.
4. Forcefully apply the parking brake.
Jump-starting and towing, starting on
page 241.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
64
Launch Control
Launch Control enables an optimum accelera-
tion when starting off on a road surface with
good traction.
Do not use Launch Control too often; oth-
erwise, the powerful stresses on the vehi-
cle will lead to premature component wear.<
Launch Control is available when the engine is
at operating temperature, i.e. after driving con-
tinuously for approx. 6.2 miles/10 km.
1. With the engine running, step on the brake
with your left foot.
2. Activate Dynamic Traction Control (DTC),
refer to page 90.
3. Activate Driving dynamics control, refer to
page 62.
4. With the vehicle stationary, activate the
manual mode and select 1
st
gear.
5. With your right foot, push the accelerator
pedal past the resistance point. The engine
speed for pulling away is adjusted. A flag
symbol appears in the instrument cluster.
6. When you release the brake pedal, the vehi-
cle accelerates. Keep the accelerator pedal
floored.
7. The upshifting occurs automatically as long
as you keep the accelerator pedal pressed
past the resistance point.
Launch Control will be ready for use again after
you drive a certain distance.
Launch Control is not available for use during
the break-in phase, refer to page 126.
To maintain driving stability, keep DSC
activated whenever possible.<
Turn signals/
headlamp flasher
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Turn signals
Using turn signals
Press the lever beyond the resistance point.
To turn off manually, press the lever to the
resistance point.
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator
lamp indicates that a turn signal indicator
has failed.<
Indicating a turn briefly
Press the lever as far as the resistance point for
as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
65
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Triple turn signal activation
Press the lever as far as the resistance point.
The turn signals flash three times.
You can activate or deactivate this function.
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Triple turn signal"
Triple turn signal activation is activated and
is stored for the remote control currently in use.
Wiper system
1 Switching on wipers
2 Switching off wipers or brief wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent wipe or
rain sensor
*
4 Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
5 Setting speed for intermittent wipe,
or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Switching on wipers
Press the lever upward, arrow 1.
The lever automatically returns to its initial
position when released.
Normal wiper speed
Press once.
The system switches to operation in the inter-
mittent mode when the vehicle is stationary.
Fast wiper speed
Press twice or press beyond the resistance
point.
The system switches to normal speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
Intermittent wipe or rain sensor*
If the car is not equipped with a rain sensor, the
intermittent-wipe time is a preset.
If the car is equipped with a rain sensor, the time
between wipes is controlled automatically and
depends on the intensity of the rainfall. The rain
sensor is mounted on the windshield, directly in
front of the interior rearview mirror.
Activating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the
button lights up.
Setting speed for intermittent wipe
or sensitivity of the rain sensor
Turn thumbwheel 5 up or down.
Deactivating intermittent wipe or rain
sensor
Press the button again, arrow 3.
The LED goes out.
Deactivate the rain sensor before enter-
ing an automatic car wash. Failure to do
so could result in damage caused by undesired
wiper activation.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
66
Cleaning windshield and headlamps*
Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Washer fluid is sprayed onto the windshield and
the wipers are operated for a short time.
When the vehicle lighting system is switched
on, the headlamps are cleaned at regular and
appropriate intervals.
Do not use the washers if there is any
danger that the fluid will freeze on the
windshield. If you do, your vision could be
obscured. Antifreeze should therefore be
added to the fluid, refer to Washer fluid.
Do not use the washers when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty; otherwise, you will damage
the washer pump.<
Windshield washer nozzles
The windshield washer nozzles are heated
automatically
* while the engine is running or
the ignition is switched on.
Washer fluid
Washer fluid antifreeze is flammable.
Therefore, keep it away from ignition
sources and only store it in the closed original
container that is kept out of reach of children;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury.
Comply with the instructions on the con-
tainer.<
Washer fluid filler neck
Only refill washer fluid when the engine is
cool to avoid contact with hot engine
parts. Otherwise, fluid spills constitute a fire
hazard and a risk to personal safety.<
All washer nozzles are supplied with washer
fluid by the same reservoir.
Fill with water and, if required, with a washer
antifreeze, according to manufacturer's recom-
mendations.
Mix the water and antifreeze before filling
the washer fluid reservoir to make sure
the correct concentration is maintained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6.3 US quarts/6 liters.
Cruise control*
The concept
Cruise control is available for use at speeds of
approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h. The car then stores
and maintains the speed that you specify using
the lever on the steering column. In order to
maintain the specified speed, the system
brakes the vehicle when the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill gradients.
Do not use cruise control when driving at
constant speed is prevented by adverse
conditions, e.g. winding roads, dense traffic or
poor road conditions due to, e.g., snow, rain, ice
or loose surfaces. Otherwise, you could lose
control of the vehicle and cause an accident as
aresult.<
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. The system is deactivated when you
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
67
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
One lever for all functions
1 Storing and maintaining speed or accelerat-
ing
2 Storing and maintaining speed or deceler-
ating
3 Deactivating cruise control
4 Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Maintaining current speed
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull it briefly, arrow 2.
The car's current speed is stored and main-
tained. It is displayed on the speedometer and
briefly in the instrument cluster.
On uphill gradients, it may prove impossible to
maintain the set speed if current engine power
output is insufficient. If the engine braking
effect is insufficient on downhill slopes, the sys-
tem will brake the vehicle slightly.
Increasing desired speed
Repeatedly press the lever to the resistance
point or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired
speed is reached.
> Each time the lever is pressed to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Accelerating using the lever
Accelerating slightly:
Press the lever to the resistance point, arrow 1,
until the desired speed is reached.
Accelerating significantly:
Press the lever beyond the resistance point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The vehicle accelerates without pressure on
the accelerator pedal. The system stores and
maintains the speed.
Decreasing speed
Repeatedly pull the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is pulled to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is decreased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is pulled beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
reduced by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until the
minimum speed of 20 mph or 30 km/h is
achieved.
The system stores and maintains the speed.
Deactivating cruise control
Tap the lever upwards or downwards, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically
deactivated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift
to neutral in cars with manual transmission
> When you select the automatic transmis-
sion's neutral position N
> When you select the neutral position N with
the Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
> When you activate DTC or deactivate DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
Cruise control is not deactivated by depressing
the accelerator pedal. Once the accelerator
pedal is released, the stored speed is achieved
again and maintained.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
68
Warning lamp
The warning lamp lights up when
cruise control is deactivated due
to control intervention by the DSC,
for example. A message appears on the
Control Display.
Resuming a speed stored beforehand
Press the button, arrow 4. The last stored
speed is resumed and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N
> In cars with Sports automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selec-
tor lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored speed
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met.
Calling up Check Control messages, refer to
page 85.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp comes on when
the system has failed. A message
appears on the Control Display.
More information can be found beginning on
page 84.
Active cruise control*
The concept
With active cruise control, you can select a
desired speed which is not only automatically
maintained when driving on open roadways, but
also varied to maintain a selected distance set-
ting as slower traffic is encountered.
Active cruise control is a technological advance
over the familiar cruise control and is a welcome
relief from the constant adjustment of speed
that can accompany driving in traffic on high-
ways or other high-speed thoroughfares. Espe-
cially on longer trips, the system can reduce
fatigue and tension, while increasing your
enjoyment of driving. Please use it safely and
responsibly.
Within the limits of its capability, the system
automatically adapts the car's speed to that of a
slower vehicle in front of you. You can specify
the distance to be maintained from the vehicle
in front in four stages. For safety reasons, the
distance is speed-dependent. Based on your
selected distance setting, the system automat-
ically decreases the throttle setting and lightly
applies the brakes if necessary. The vehicle
brake lamps will automatically illuminate to sig-
nal a following driver to take action. In addition,
it may be necessary for the vehicle or the driver
to downshift, depending on the kind of trans-
mission your vehicle is equipped with, to main-
tain the distance setting selected. If the vehicle
ahead speeds up or when the lane ahead
becomes clear, your vehicle will accelerate to
the speed you have selected by increasing the
throttle setting and shifting gears automatically
or by the driver as needed. Your selected speed
will be held when driving downhill, too.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
69
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Since this active cruise control system is a new
technology and operates differently from con-
ventional cruise control systems which you may
be accustomed to, you are strongly urged to
read all of the pages relating to this system
before use. Pay special attention to the System
limitations section beginning on page 73.
Braking sensation
> If you step on the brake pedal while the sys-
tem is braking, pedal sensation will be
slightly different from the usual.
> Possible noises during automatic braking
are normal.
Manual transmission
You can shift gears while cruise control is acti-
vated. The system is deactivated when you
drive at very low engine speeds for an extended
period.
Range of applications
The minimum desired speed is 20 mph or
30 km/h, the maximum desired speed is
110 mph or 180 km/h.
As with conventional cruise control sys-
tems, active cruise control in no way
diminishes or substitutes for the driver’s own
personal responsibility, alertness and aware-
ness in adjusting speed, braking or otherwise
controlling the vehicle. The driver should
decide when to use the system on the basis of
road, traffic, visibility, and weather conditions.
Active cruise control is intended for use on
highway-type roadways where traffic is moving
relatively smoothly. Do not use this system in
city driving; heavy traffic such as during rush
hour; on curvy, winding roads, slippery roads or
roads with sharp curves such as highway off-
ramps; during inclement weather such as snow,
strong rain or fog; or when entering inter-
changes, service/parking areas or toll booths.
It is also important to regulate your vehicle's
speed and distance setting within applicable
legal limits. Always be ready to take action or
apply the brakes if necessary, especially when
the system is actively following a vehicle in front
of you. Otherwise, driving situations could
result that pose the risk of accidents.<
One lever for all functions
1 Store and increase desired speed
2 Store and decrease desired speed
3 Deactivate system, refer to page 70
4 Resume stored desired speed and dis-
tance, refer to page 71
5 Select distance to vehicle driving ahead,
refer to page 70
Storing current speed
Briefly push lever, arrow 1, or pull lever, arrow 2,
at a driving speed of more than approx. 20 mph
or 30 km/h.
The car's current speed is stored. It is displayed
on the speedometer and briefly in the instru-
ment cluster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
70
Increasing desired speed
Press or tap the lever to the resistance point
or beyond, arrow 1, until the desired speed is
displayed.
> Each time the lever is tapped to the resis-
tance point, the desired speed is increased
by approx. 1 mph or 1 km/h.
> Each time the lever is tapped beyond the
resistance point, the desired speed is
increased by up to 5 mph or 10 km/h until
the maximum speed of 110 mph or 180 km/
h is achieved.
The speed then displayed is stored and
achieved on a clear road.
Decreasing desired speed
Pull the lever, arrow 2, until the desired speed is
displayed.
The other functions work analogously to those
described under Increasing desired speed.
Selecting distance
> Press downward:
Increase distance.
> Press upward:
Decrease distance.
The selected distance is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Use good judgment to select the appro-
priate following distance given road con-
ditions, traffic, applicable laws and driving rec-
ommendations for safe following distance.
Otherwise, an accident risk could result.<
Deactivating cruise control
Press the lever upward or downward, arrow 3.
The displays on the speedometer disappear.
In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
vated:
> When you brake the vehicle
> When the speed is reduced to below
20 mph or 30 km/h due to a traffic situation
> When you switch gears very slowly or shift
to neutral in cars with manual transmission
Distance 1
Distance 2
Distance 3
Distance 4
This is always the preset dis-
tance when you use the system
for the first time after starting
the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
71
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
> When you select the automatic transmis-
sion's neutral position N
> When you select the neutral position N with
the Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
> When you activate the Dynamic Traction
Control DTC
> When you deactivate the Dynamic Stability
Control DSC
> When DSC or ABS is intervening
> When the system does not recognize any
objects for a longer period of time, e.g. on
infrequently traveled roads without a shoul-
der or guard rails, or if the radar sensor is
covered with dirt, refer to page 72
> When you apply the parking brake
When the system is deactivated, you
must brake the vehicle yourself and/or
maneuver as necessary; otherwise, there is a
risk of accidents.<
Warning lamp
The warning lamp comes on when
active cruise control has been auto-
matically deactivated, for example
due to a driving speed below 20 mph or 30 km/
h or a DSC intervention. A message appears on
the Control Display.
Resuming stored desired speed and
distance
Briefly press the button, arrow 4.
The stored speed and distance are regained
and maintained.
In the following instances, the stored speed is
deleted and can no longer be resumed:
> When driving stability control systems are
intervening
> In cars with manual transmission: when you
shift gears very slowly or shift to neutral
> In cars with automatic transmission: when
you engage selector lever position N
> In cars with Sports automatic transmission
with double clutch: when you engage selec-
tor lever position N
> When the ignition is switched off
Displays in the instrument cluster
1 Stored desired speed
2 Shows yellow: vehicle detected ahead
Flashes in red: system cannot maintain dis-
tance; driver must brake the vehicle
Flashes in yellow: driving stability control
systems are intervening; cruise control is
deactivated
3 Selected distance to vehicle ahead
The indicator lights up as soon as the sys-
tem is activated.
4 Selected desired speed is temporarily dis-
played
If --- mph or --- km/h temporarily appears
in the instrument cluster display, it is pos-
sible that the system prerequisites for operation
are currently not met. Calling up Check Control
messages, refer to page 85.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
72
Warning lamps
The indicator 2 flashes in red; a
signal sounds.
The system indicates that you
must brake and/or maneuver the
vehicle yourself. Active cruise con-
trol cannot automatically restore the distance to
the vehicle ahead.
This indicator does not release you from your
responsibility to adapt your desired speed and
driving style to prevailing driving conditions.
The indicator 2 flashes in yellow.
The prerequisites for operating
active cruise control are not met,
e.g. as a result of ABS or DSC
interventions. Active cruise control
is deactivated. You can reactivate the system, if
desired, by tapping or pulling the lever when
road and traffic conditions permit. It is not pos-
sible to resume a stored speed.
Radar sensor
The sensor's ability to detect vehicles ahead
may be restricted as a result of heavy rain, dirt,
snow or ice. If necessary, clean the radar sensor
located in the front bumper, see arrow. Be sure
to use particular care when removing any layers
of snow or ice from the sensor.
The system cannot be activated if the sensor is
incorrectly aligned.
For US owners only
The transmitter and receiver units comply with
part 15 of the FCC/Federal Communications
Commission regulations. Operation is gov-
erned by the following:
FCC ID:
NF3 ACC2SCU 003YK04001 0000
Compliance statement:
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
> This device must not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
> this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modifications or
changes to these devices could void the
user’s authority to operate this equipment.<
Malfunction
The warning lamp comes on when
the system has failed. A message
appears on the Control Display. More
information can be found beginning on
page 84.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
73
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
System limitations
Always remember that the range and abil-
ity of the system does have physical limi-
tations. It will not apply the brakes or decelerate
your vehicle when there is a slow-moving vehi-
cle, stopped vehicle or stationary object ahead
of you, as for example, at a traffic light or a
parked vehicle. Also, the system does not react
to oncoming traffic, pedestrians or other types
of potential traffic such as a rider on horseback.
It is also possible that the system may not
detect smaller moving objects such as motor-
cycles or bicycles. Be especially alert when
encountering any of these situations as the sys-
tem will neither automatically brake, nor provide
a warning to you. Also, be aware that every
decrease in the distance setting allows your
vehicle to come closer to a vehicle in front of
you and requires a heightened amount of alert-
ness.<
Active cruise control is not and must not
be used as a collision avoidance/warning
system.<
If while your vehicle is actively following a vehi-
cle in front of you and the vehicle ahead speeds
up or the lane ahead becomes clear, then your
vehicle will accelerate to the speed you have
selected. Be aware that changing to a clear,
unobstructed lane will also result in your vehicle
accelerating.
Be certain to deactivate the system when
you pull into an exit lane for a highway off-
ramp.<
Also, vehicles traveling in a staggered manner
on a highway may cause a delay in the system's
reaction to a vehicle in front of you or may cause
the system to react to a vehicle actually in the
lane next to you. Always be ready to take action
or apply the brakes if necessary.
While active cruise control is capable of
braking your vehicle automatically when
you approach a slower vehicle ahead, it is
important to be aware that the ability of the sys-
tem to apply the brakes is also limited, e.g.
when you reduce your desired speed sharply.
The system cannot stop your vehicle. It uses
only a portion of braking system capacity and
does not utilize the full capacity of the vehicle
braking system. Therefore, the system cannot
decrease your speed for large differences in
speed between your vehicle and the vehicle
ahead. Examples: when you approach a vehicle
traveling at a much lower speed than your own
speed such as approaching a toll booth or when
a much slower vehicle cuts in front of you at
close range.<
Active cruise control can only decelerate the
vehicle to approx. 20 mph or 30 km/h.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving
74
Swerving vehicles
When a vehicle moves from an adjacent lane
into your lane, active cruise control will not rec-
ognize this vehicle until it is fully in your lane
ahead of your vehicle.
When a vehicle ahead suddenly swerves
into your lane, the system may not be able
to maintain the selected distance automatically.
This also applies to great differences in speed
between you and vehicles ahead, e.g. when
quickly approaching a truck. There is a risk of
collision. Once the system has established that
a vehicle is indeed in front of you, it will indicate
that you must brake and/or maneuver the vehi-
cle yourself. Take action yourself; otherwise,
there is a risk of an accident.<
Behavior in curves
Because of the limited range of the system, it is
possible that in curves or on the peaks and val-
leys of hilly roads, a vehicle ahead may be rec-
ognized late, or not at all. Therefore, it is up to
the driver to select a speed that is prudent in
view of the curves and terrain of the roadway.
In approaching a curve, it is possible that active
cruise control would react briefly to a vehicle in
the adjacent lane. In addition, the system can
sense if your vehicle is in a curve and may not
accelerate. If your vehicle decelerates in either
case, you can choose to overcome the deceler-
ation by briefly pressing the accelerator pedal.
Your responsibility
Your actions have priority at all times. When you
press the accelerator pedal while driving with
active cruise control, the automatic braking
function will be temporarily interrupted. Once
you release the accelerator pedal, the desired
speed or the selected distance to the vehicle
ahead is achieved again.
Do not leave your foot on the accelerator
pedal and make sure that no objects such
as floor mats are lying on the accelerator pedal.
Otherwise, the system may not be able to brake
the vehicle.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
75
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Controls overview
Odometer, outside
temperature display, clock
1 Knob in the instrument cluster
2 Outside temperature display and clock
3 Odometer and trip odometer
Knob in the instrument cluster
> To reset the trip odometer while the ignition
is switched on
> To display the time, outside temperature
and odometer briefly while the ignition is
switched off
Units of measure
To select the respective units of measure, miles
or km for the odometer as well as 7 or 6 for
the outside temperature, refer to page 80.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Time, outside temperature display
Setting the time, refer to page 83.
Outside temperature warning
When the displayed temperature sinks to
approx. +377/+36, a signal sounds and a
warning lamp lights up. There is an increased
risk of black ice.
Black ice can also form at temperatures
above +377/+36. You should there-
fore drive carefully on bridges and shaded
roads, for example; otherwise, there is an
increased risk of an accident.<
Odometer and trip odometer
Resetting the trip odometer:
With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
the instrument cluster.
When the vehicle is parked
If you still want to view the time, outside tem-
perature and odometer reading briefly after the
remote control has been taken out of the igni-
tion lock:
Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
Tachometer
Never force the engine speed up into the red
warning field, see arrow. In this range, the fuel
supply is interrupted to protect the engine.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
76
Coolant temperature
A warning lamp will come on if the coolant,
and therefore the engine, becomes too hot.
In addition, a message will appear on the
Control Display.
Check coolant level, refer to page 226.
Engine oil temperature*
When the engine is at normal operating temper-
ature, the engine oil temperature is between
approx. 2107/1006 and approx. 3007/
1506.
If the engine oil temperature is too high, a mes-
sage appears on the Control Display.
Fuel gauge
Fuel tank capacity: approx. 16.1 gallons/
61 liters.
You can find information on refueling on
page 207.
If the tilt of the vehicle varies for a longer period,
when you are driving in mountainous areas, for
example, the indicator may fluctuate slightly.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message briefly appears on the Control
Display and the cruising range for the remaining
amount of fuel is displayed on the computer.
Under a cruising range of approx. 30 miles/
50 km, the message remains in the
Control Display.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Computer
Displays in the instrument cluster
Calling up information
Press the button in the turn indicator lever.
The following items of information are dis-
played in the order listed:
> Cruising range
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
> Current fuel consumption
*
> No information
To set the corresponding units of measure,
refer to Units of measure on page 80.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
77
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cruising range
Displays the estimated cruising range available
with the remaining fuel. The range is calculated
on the basis of the way the car has been driven
over the last 18 miles/30 km and the amount of
fuel currently in the tank.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Average speed
Periods with the vehicle parked and the engine
switched off are not included in the calculations
of average speed.
With the trip computer, refer to page 78, you
can have the average speed for another trip dis-
played.
To reset average speed: press the button in the
turn indicator lever for approx. 2 seconds.
Average fuel consumption
The average fuel consumption is calculated for
the time during which the engine is running.
You can have the average consumption for
another trip displayed, refer to Displays on the
Control Display below.
To reset average fuel consumption: press the
button in the turn indicator lever for approx.
2seconds.
Current fuel consumption
Displays the current fuel consumption. This
allows you to see whether your current driving
style is conducive to fuel economy with mini-
mum exhaust emissions.
Displays on the Control Display
The computer can also be opened via iDrive.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
Displays on the "Onboard info":
> Cruising range
> Distance from destination
> Estimated time of arrival if:
> A distance was manually entered in the
computer, refer to the information
below.
> A destination was entered in the naviga-
tion system
*, refer to page 135.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
78
Displays on the "Trip computer":
> Departure time
> Trip duration
> Trip distance
Both displays show:
> The average speed and
> the average fuel consumption.
Resetting the fuel consumption and
speed
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Resetting the trip computer
You can reset all values:
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Trip computer"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
79
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings and information
Operating principle
1 Button for:
> Selecting display
> Setting values
2 Button for:
> Confirming selected display or set val-
ues
> Calling up computer information 76
3 When the lights are on: instrument lighting
brightness 105
4 Calling up Check Control 84
5 Checking engine oil level 223
6 Setting the time 83
7 Setting the date 84
8 Viewing service requirement display 80
Exiting displays
The outside temperature reading and the time
reappear when you press button 2 or if you
make no entries within approx. 15 seconds.
If required, complete the current setting first.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
80
Units of measure
Setting the units of measure
You can change the units for fuel consumption,
route/distance, temperature and pressure.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. Select the desired menu item.
4. Select the desired unit.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Service requirements
The remaining driving distance and the date of
the next scheduled service are displayed briefly
immediately after you start the engine or switch
on the ignition.
The extent of service work required can
be read out from the remote control by
your BMW Service Advisor.<
For certain maintenance operations, you can
view the respective distance remaining or due
date individually in the instrument cluster.
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "SERVICE-INFO".
3. Press button 2.
4. Use button 1 to scroll through the individual
service items.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
81
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Possible displays
1 Button for selecting functions
2 Service requirements
3 Engine oil
4 Roadworthiness test
*
5 Front brake pads
6 Rear brake pads
7 Brake fluid
The sequence of displayed service items may
vary. The data for the next service appointment
is shown first.
More information
Detailed information on service
requirements
You can call up additional information on the
maintenance regimen on the Control Display.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
Required maintenance procedures and legally
mandated inspections are displayed.
You can request more detailed information on
every entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Symbols
No service is currently required.
The deadline for service or a legally
mandated inspection is approaching.
Please schedule a service appointment.
The service deadline has already passed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
82
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections*
Make sure the date on the Control Display is set
correctly, refer to page 84; otherwise, the effec-
tiveness of CBS Condition Based Service is not
ensured.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Service required"
4. "§ Vehicle inspection"
5. Open the menu for entering the deadline.
6. "Date:"
7. Create the settings.
8. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The year is highlighted.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
10. Press the controller to apply the setting.
The date entry is stored.
To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
More information on the BMW Maintenance
System can be found on page 227.
Automatic Service Request*
Data regarding the maintenance status or
legally mandated inspections of the vehicle are
automatically transmitted to your BMW center
prior to a service due date.
You can check when your BMW center was
notified.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Options"
4. "Last Service Request"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
83
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Clock
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the time
In the instrument cluster
To set the 12h/24h mode, refer to Setting the
time format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the time and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the hours.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Use button 1 to set the minutes.
6. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
7. Press button 2.
The system accepts the new time.
Via iDrive
1. Press the MENU button.
The main menu is displayed.
2. "Settings"
Setting the time
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Time:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired hours
are displayed, and then press the controller.
5. Turn the controller until the desired minutes
are displayed, and then press the controller.
The time is stored.
Setting the time format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The time format is stored.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
84
Date
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile on
page 26.
Setting the date
In the instrument cluster
To set the dd/mm or mm/dd date format, refer
to Setting the date format below.
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the date and the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Use button 1 to set the day of the month.
4. Press button 2 to confirm the entry.
5. Set the month and the year in the same way.
6. Press button 2.
The system stores the new date.
Via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Date:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired day is
displayed, and press the controller.
5. Create the necessary settings for the
month and year.
The date is stored.
Setting the date format
1. "Settings"
2. "Time/Date"
3. "Format:"
4. Select the desired format.
The date format is stored.
Check Control
The concept
The Check Control monitors vehicle functions
and alerts you to any malfunctions in the sys-
tems monitored. This type of Check Control
message includes indicator and warning lamps
in the instrument cluster and, in some cases, an
acoustic signal and text messages at the top of
the Control Display.
Indicator and warning lamps
Indicator and warning lamps can light up in a
variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lamps are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when the
engine is started or the ignition is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
85
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
indicates that Check Control messages have
been stored. These Check Control messages
can be viewed again later, refer to page 85.
Text messages
Text messages at the upper edge of the Control
Display explain the meaning of the displayed
indicator and warning lamps.
Supplementary text messages
You can call up more information on the Control
Display, e.g. on the cause of a malfunction and
on how to respond, via Check Control.
The text of urgent messages is displayed auto-
matically.
To exit the display:
Select "OK" and press the controller.
Hiding Check Control messages
Press the button on the turn indicator lever.
> Some Check Control messages are dis-
played continuously and remain visible until
the malfunction has been rectified. If several
malfunctions occur at once, the messages
are displayed consecutively.
These messages can be hidden for approx.
8 seconds. After this, they are displayed
again automatically.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
> Other Check Control messages are hidden
automatically after approx. 20 seconds.
They are stored and can be displayed again
later.
They are marked with the symbol
shown here.
Displaying stored Check Control
messages
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol appears in the display, accompa-
nied by the words "CHECK CONTROL".
2. Press button 2.
"CHECK OK" appears if there are no Check
Control messages.
If a Check Control message has been
stored, the corresponding lamp comes on.
It is accompanied by a text message on the
Control Display.
3. Push button 1 to check for other messages.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls overview
86
Via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Check Control"
4. Select the text message.
Speed limit
You can enter a speed, and a Check Control
message will indicate when you reach this
speed. This enables you, for example, to
receive warnings if you exceed a speed limit in
an urban area.
You are only warned of reaching this speed a
second time if your vehicle speed falls below it
again by at least 3 mph or 5 km/h.
Displaying, setting or changing the
limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning at:"
4. Turn the controller until the desired speed
is displayed.
5. Press the controller.
The speed limit is stored.
Applying your current speed as
the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Select current speed"
4. Press the controller.
The system adopts your current speed as the
limit.
Activating/deactivating the limit
1. "Settings"
2. "Speed"
3. "Warning"
4. Press the controller.
The limit warning is switched on.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
87
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Settings on the
Control Display
Language on the Control Display
Setting the language
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Language:"
4. Select the desired language.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Setting the voice dialog
Switch between a standard dialog and a short
dialog.
1. "Settings"
2. "Language/Units"
3. "Speech mode:"
4. Select the desired dialog.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Brightness of the Control Display
The brightness is automatically adapted to the
ambient lighting conditions. However, you can
change the basic setting.
1. "Settings"
2. "Control display"
3. "Brightness"
4. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is selected.
5. Press the controller.
The setting is stored for the remote control
currently in use. In bright conditions, for exam-
ple, the brightness control may not be clearly
visible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
88
Technology for driving comfort and safety
Park Distance Control PDC*
The concept
The PDC assists you with maneuvering in tight
parking spaces. Acoustic signals and a visual
indicator
warn you of the presence of an object
in front of
* or behind your vehicle. To measure
the distance, there are four ultrasonic sensors
in either bumper.
These sensors have a range of approx. 6.5 ft/
2 m. However, an acoustic warning does not
sound until the sensors at the front
* and at the
two rear corners are approx. 24 in/60 cm away
from the object and the middle rear sensors are
approx. 5 ft/1,50 m away from it.
PDC is a parking aid that can indicate
objects when they are approached
slowly, as is usually the case when parking.
Avoid approaching an object at high speed; oth-
erwise, physical circumstances may lead to the
system warning being issued too late.<
Switching on automatically
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the system is activated after approx. one
second when you shift into reverse or move the
automatic transmission selector lever to
position R. Wait this short period before driving.
Switching off automatically
After approx. 55 yd/50 m of driving or above
approx. 20 mph/approx. 30 km/h, the system
switches off and the LED goes out.
Switching on manually*
Press the button; the LED lights up.
Switching off manually*
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
Signal tones
When nearing an object, its position is indicated
correspondingly by an interval tone. For exam-
ple, if an object is detected behind the vehicle,
the signal tone sounds from the rear. As the dis-
tance between vehicle and object decreases,
the intervals between the tones become
shorter. If the distance to the nearest object
falls to below roughly 1 ft/30 cm, then a contin-
uous tone sounds.
An interval tone is interrupted after approx.
3seconds
> If you remain in front of an object that has
been detected by only one of the corner
sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
89
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Malfunction
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster comes on. PDC is malfunc-
tioning. A message appears on the
Control Display. Have the system checked.
To avoid this problem, keep the sensors clean
and free of ice or snow in order to ensure that
they will continue to operate effectively. When
using a high-pressure cleaner, do not spray the
sensors for extended periods of time and only
from a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.
Manual operation*
The LED above the button also flashes.
PDC with visual warning
The approach of the vehicle to an object is
shown on the Control Display. Objects that are
farther away are displayed on the Control Dis-
play before a signal tone sounds. The display
appears on the Control Display as soon as PDC
is activated.
System limitations
Even with PDC, final responsibility for
estimating the distance between the
vehicle and any obstructions always remains
with the driver. Even when sensors are pro-
vided, there is a blind spot in which objects can
no longer be detected. The system is also sub-
ject to the physical limits that apply to all forms
of ultrasonic measurement, such as those
encountered with trailer towbars and hitches,
thin or wedge-shaped objects, etc. Low objects
that have already been displayed, e.g. curbs,
can disappear again from the detection area of
the sensors before or after a continuous tone
sounds. Higher, protruding objects, e.g. ledges,
cannot be detected. Therefore, always drive
cautiously; otherwise, there is a risk of personal
injury or property damage.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal. Therefore,
always drive cautiously; otherwise, there is a
risk of personal injury or property damage.<
Driving stability control
systems
Your BMW has a number of systems that help
to maintain the vehicle's stability even in
adverse driving conditions.
Antilock Brake System ABS
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during
braking. Safe steering response is maintained
even during full braking. Active safety is thus
increased.
The ABS is operational every time you start the
engine. Braking safely, refer to page 128.
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV
The system controls the brake pressure in the
rear wheels to ensure stable braking behavior.
Dynamic Brake Control DBC
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this system
automatically produces the maximum braking
force boost and thus helps to achieve the short-
est possible braking distance during full brak-
ing. This system exploits all of the benefits pro-
vided by ABS.
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake for the
duration of the full braking application.
Dynamic Stability Control DSC
DSC prevents the driving wheels from losing
traction when you pull away from rest or accel-
erate. The system also recognizes unstable
driving conditions, for example if the rear of the
car is about to swerve or if momentum is acting
at an angle past the front wheels. In these
cases, DSC helps the vehicle maintain a safe
course within physical limits by reducing engine
output and through braking actions at the indi-
vidual wheels.
The laws of physics cannot be repealed,
even with DSC. An appropriate driving
style always remains the responsibility of the
driver. Therefore, do not reduce the additional
safety margin again by taking risks, as this could
result in an accident.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
90
Deactivating DSC
Press the button for at least 3 seconds; the indi-
cator lamps for DSC in the instrument cluster
light up. Dynamic Traction Control DTC and
DSC have been simultaneously deactivated.
Stabilizing and drive-output promoting actions
are no longer executed.
In the same way as with a differential interlock
*,
even if DSC is deactivated, brake actions are
still performed to enhance drive output if the
drive wheels experience a significant loss of
traction.
To increase vehicle stability, activate DSC again
as soon as possible.
Activating DSC
Press the button again; the indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster go out.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DSC is regulating the drive and brak-
ing forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DSC is deactivated.
Dynamic Traction Control DTC
DTC is a version of DSC in which the drive out-
put is optimized for particular road conditions,
e.g. unplowed snow-covered roads. The sys-
tem assures the maximal drive output, but with
reduced driving stability. It is therefore neces-
sary to drive with appropriate caution.
You may find it useful to briefly activate DTC
under the following special circumstances:
> When driving uphill on snow-covered roads,
in slush or on unplowed, snow-covered
roads
> When rocking a stuck vehicle free or start-
ing off in deep snow or on loose ground
> When driving with snow chains
Activating DTC
Press the button; the indicator lamps for DTC
in the instrument cluster come on.
For better control
If the indicator lamp flashes:
DTC is regulating the drive and
braking forces.
If the indicator lamps are on:
DTC has been activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster go out.
xDrive*
xDrive is your BMW's four-wheel-drive system.
The combined efforts of xDrive and DSC help to
further optimize traction and driving dynamics.
The xDrive four-wheel-drive system distributes
driving power variably to the front and rear axles
depending on the driving situation and road
conditions.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
91
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Hill Descent Control HDC*
HDC is a downhill driving assistant that controls
your speed on steep downhill gradients and
makes it even easier to control your BMW's
handling under these conditions. The vehicle
then moves slightly faster than double walking
speed without the driver needing to intervene.
HDC can be activated as long as you are driving
under approx. 20 mph or 35 km/h. When driving
downhill at a speed of under approx. 20 mph or
35 km/h, the vehicle's speed is automatically
reduced to slightly more than double walking
speed and maintained.
Increasing or decreasing speed
By accelerating or braking you can change this
speed within a range from approx. 3 to 15 mph,
approx. 5 to 25 km/h.
You can specify a target speed within the same
range using the cruise control
* lever on the
steering column.
1 To increase speed
2 To decrease speed
Activating HDC
Press the button; the LED lights up.
When the vehicle is being braked automatically,
the LED flashes.
Deactivating HDC
Press the button again; the LED goes out.
HDC is automatically deactivated at speeds
greater than approx. 35 mph/60 km/h.
Using HDC
In cars with manual transmission:
Use HDC in lower gears and in reverse gear.
With automatic transmission:
You can use HDC in any drive position.
Displays in the instrument cluster*
1 Display for target speed
2 HDC display
Malfunction
The HDC display disappears during HDC oper-
ation, or does not appear:
HDC is temporarily unavailable due to exces-
sive brake temperature, or DSC has failed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
92
Drive-off assistant
The drive-off assistant enables you to drive off
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary
to use the parking brake for this.
1. Hold the car in place by depressing the
brake.
2. Release the brake and drive off without
delay.
The drive-off assistant holds the car in
place for approx. 2 seconds after the
brake is released. Drive off without delay after
releasing the brake. Otherwise, the drive-off
assistant will no longer hold the car in place
after approx. 2 seconds and the car will start to
roll backwards.<
Flat Tire Monitor FTM*
The concept
The system does not measure the actual infla-
tion pressure in the tires.
The system detects a tire pressure loss due to
speed comparisons among the individual
wheels as you drive.
In the event of pressure loss, the rolling circum-
ference changes and, thus, the rotating speed
of the affected wheel. The system detects this
and reports it as a flat tire.
Functional requirement
The system has to have been initialized at the
correct inflation pressure; otherwise, a reliable
reporting of a flat tire is not assured.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been cor-
rected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reinitialize the system.
System limitations
It is impossible to provide advance warn-
ing of sudden, severe tire damage caused
by outside influences.<
The system will not detect a natural, uniform
pressure loss in all four tires. Therefore you
should check the inflation pressure regularly.
In the following situations, the system could be
delayed or malfunction:
> System has not been initialized
> Driving on snowy or slippery road surface
> Performance-oriented style of driving: slip
in the drive wheels, high lateral acceleration
> Driving with snow chains
*
Status display
The current status of the Flat Tire Monitor can
be displayed on the Control Display, e.g.
whether or not the FTM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The status is displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
93
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Initialization
In the initialization, the set inflation pressures
are adopted as reference values for the detec-
tion of a flat tire. The initialization is begun by
confirmation of the inflation pressures.
Do not initialize the system while snow chains
are attached.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset".
6. Start driving.
The initialization is completed during driv-
ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
When driving resumes, the initialization is con-
tinued automatically.<
Indication of a flat tire
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, an
acoustic signal sounds. There is a flat
tire or substantial loss of tire pressure.
What to do in case of a flat tire
Run-flat tires
With a damaged tire, is possible to continue
driving at speeds of up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
not equipped with run-flat tires, refer to
page 220; continued driving could result in a
severe accident.<
When continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering maneu-
vers.
2. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
3. At the next opportunity, check the air pres-
sure in all four tires.
If all four tires are inflated to the cor-
rect pressures, the Flat Tire Monitor
might not have been initialized. The system
must then be initialized.<
Possible travel distance with complete tire
pressure loss:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
Approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
Approx. 94 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, cargo area full:
Approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed
a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises during driving
may indicate the final failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident.
Do not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
94
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM*
The concept
Check the inflation pressure in the four installed
tires. The system notifies you if there is a signif-
icant loss of pressure in one or more tires.
Functional requirement
The system has to have been reset at the cor-
rect inflation pressure; otherwise, a reliable
reporting of a flat tire is not assured.
Always use wheels with TPM electronics to
assure a trouble-free function of the system.
Each time a tire inflation pressure has
been corrected or a wheel or tire has been
changed, reset the system.<
System limitations
It is impossible to provide advance warn-
ing of sudden, severe tire damage caused
by outside influences.<
The system does not function correctly if it has
not been reset. For example, a flat tire may be
indicated even though the tire inflation pres-
sures are correct.
The system is inactive and cannot indicate a flat
tire:
> when a wheel without TPM electronics is
installed.
> when other systems or devices that use the
same radio frequency interfere with TPM.
Status display
The current status of the TPM Tire Pressure
Monitor can be displayed on the Control Dis-
play, e.g. whether or not the TPM is active.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor - TPM"
The status is displayed.
Status indicator on the Control Display
The color of the tires represents the status of
the tires and the system.
A change in the inflation pressure during driving
is taken into account.
A correction is only needed if TPM indicates it.
Green
The inflation pressure corresponds to the
desired state.
"TPM active" appears on the Control Display.
One wheel yellow
There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire pres-
sure in the indicated tire.
All wheels yellow
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure in several tires.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and will thus issue warnings at the
last initialized inflation pressures.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
95
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Gray
The system cannot detect a puncture.
The reasons for this are as follows:
> TPM is being reset.
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency.
> Malfunction.
Resetting the system
Each time a tire inflation pressure has been
corrected or a wheel or tire has been changed,
reset the system.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Reset TPM"
4. Start the engine – do not drive away.
5. Start the initialization using "Reset TPM".
6. Start driving.
The tires are shown in gray and "Resetting
TPM..." is displayed.
After driving a few minutes, the set inflation
pressures in the tires are accepted as the target
values to be monitored. The resetting is com-
pleted automatically as you drive. On the Con-
trol Display, the tires are shown in green and
"Status: TPM active" is displayed again.
You can stop driving at any time. The resetting
continues automatically when you resume driv-
ing.
If a flat tire is detected during the reset-
ting process, all tires are displayed in
yellow in the Control Display. The message
"Low tire!" is shown.<
Message for low tire inflation pressure
The warning lamps come on in yellow
and red. A message appears on the
Control Display. In addition, a signal
sounds.
> There is a flat tire or substantial loss of tire
pressure.
> The system was not reset after a wheel
change and will thus issue warnings at the
last initialized inflation pressures.
Cautiously reduce speed to below 50 mph/
80 km/h. Avoid sudden braking and steering
maneuvers. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph/
80 km/h.
Do not continue driving if the vehicle is
not equipped with run-flat tires, refer to
page 220; continued driving could result in a
severe accident.<
Continuing to drive with a flat tire
Possible travel distance with complete tire
pressure loss:
> With a light load:
1 to 2 persons without luggage:
Approx. 155 miles/250 km
> With a medium load:
2 persons, cargo area full, or 4 persons
without luggage:
Approx. 95 miles/150 km
> With a full load:
4 persons, cargo area full:
Approx. 30 miles/50 km
Drive cautiously and do not exceed a
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
When there is a tire pressure loss, the handling
characteristics change, e.g. there will be
reduced directional stability during braking,
braking distances will be longer, and self-steer-
ing response will change.<
Vibrations or loud noises during driving
may indicate the final failure of the tire.
Reduce your speed and bring the vehicle to a
stop; otherwise, tire components may become
detached, which could result in an accident.
Do not continue driving; instead, contact your
BMW center.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
96
Message for unsuccessful
system reset
Yellow warning lamp comes on.
A message appears on the
Control Display.
The system is not reset, e.g. after a wheel
change.
Check the tire inflation pressure and reset
the system, refer to page 95.
Malfunction
The small warning lamp flashes in
yellow and then lights up continu-
ously; the large warning lamp comes
on in yellow. The tires appear in gray
in the Control Display. No punctures can be
detected.
Display in the following situations:
> Malfunction
Have the system checked.
> A wheel without TPM electronics has been
installed:
Have it checked by your BMW center.
> Interference from systems or devices that
use the same radio frequency:
The system automatically becomes active
again when the vehicle moves out of the
interference zone.
Declaration according to NHTSA/
FMVSS 138
Tire Pressure Monitoring Systems
Each tire should be checked monthly when cold
and inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If
your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire infla-
tion pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires. As
an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
tem, TPMS, that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your tires are signif-
icantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as possible,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly underinflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency and
tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that the
TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-
nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if underin-
flation has not reached the level at which the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale illuminates.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the sys-
tem detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously lit. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle startups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Active steering*
The concept
Active steering varies the turning angle of the
front wheels in relation to steering wheel move-
ments. It also varies the steering force required
to turn the wheels depending on the speed at
which you are driving.
When you are driving in the low road speed
range, e.g. in a town or when parking, the steer-
ing angle is increased, i.e. steering becomes
very direct and less effort is required to turn the
wheels. In the higher speed range, on the other
hand, the steering angle is reduced as the
speed increases. This improves the handling of
your BMW over the entire speed range.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
97
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
In critical situations, the system can make tar-
geted corrections to the steering angle pro-
vided by the driver and thus stabilize the vehicle
before the driver intervenes. This stabilizing
intervention is simultaneously deactivated
when DSC is switched off, refer to page 90.
Malfunction
The warning lamps light up and a
message is displayed on the Control
Display. Active steering is malfunc-
tioning or is temporarily deactivated.
At low speeds, greater steering wheel move-
ments are required, whereas at higher speeds
the vehicle reacts more sensitively to steering
wheel movements. The stability-enhancing
feature may also be deactivated. Drive cau-
tiously and think well ahead.
Deactivation
Active steering is deactivated to perform an ini-
tialization. A message indicates that the feature
is deactivated. Initialization may take several
minutes.
If the message does not disappear during the
current trip, have the system checked.
Defect
If there is a defect, a corresponding text mes-
sage appears. Have the system checked.
Servotronic*
The concept
The Servotronic varies the steering force
required to turn the wheels relative to the vehi-
cle speed.
At low speeds, the steering force is strongly
assisted, i.e. less force is needed for steering.
As the vehicle speed increases, the steering
assisting power is reduced.
Malfunction
Malfunctions are displayed via Check Control,
refer to page 84.
Brake Force Display
On the left: normal braking.
On the right: sharp braking.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
98
Airbags
The following airbags are located under the
marked covers:
1 Front airbags
2 Coupe: head airbags
3 Side airbags in the seat backrests
4 Convertible: knee airbags
Protective action
Observe the adjustment instructions on
page 42 to ensure the best possible per-
sonal protection.<
The front airbags help protect the driver and
front passenger by responding to frontal
impacts in which safety belts alone cannot pro-
vide adequate restraint. When needed, the
head and side airbags help provide protection in
the event of side impact. The relevant side air-
bag supports the side upper body area. The
head air bag supports the head.
The airbags have been designed to not be trig-
gered in every collision situation, e.g. not in
minor accidents or rear-end collisions.
Do not apply adhesive materials to the
cover panels of the airbags, cover them or
modify them in any other way.
Keep the dashboard and windows on the front
passenger side clear, i.e. do not cover with
adhesive labels or coverings, and do not attach
holders such as for navigation instruments or
mobile phones.
Do not attach seat covers, cushions or other
objects not specifically approved for seats with
integral side airbags to the front seats. Do not
hang items of clothing such as coats or jackets
over the backrests. Do not attempt to remove
the airbag retention system from the vehicle.
Do not modify the individual components of the
system or its wiring in any way. This includes
the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
instrument panel, seats and roof posts, as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not attempt
to remove or dismantle the steering wheel.
Do not touch the individual components imme-
diately after the system has been triggered,
because there is a danger of burns.
In the event of malfunctions, deactivation or
triggering of the airbag restraint system, have
the testing, repair, removal and disposal of air-
bag generators executed only by a BMW center
or a workshop that works according to repair
procedures of BMW with correspondingly
trained personnel and that has the required
explosives licenses. Unprofessional attempts
to work on the system could lead to failure in an
emergency or to undesired airbag activation,
either of which could result in personal injury.<
Warning notices and information about the air-
bags can also be found on the sun visors.
Automatic deactivation of the front
passenger airbags
An analysis of the impression in the front pas-
senger seat cushion determines whether and
how the seat is occupied. The front and side air-
bags for the front passenger are activated or
deactivated by the system accordingly.
The indicator lamp above the interior
rearview mirror shows the current status
of the front passenger airbags, deactivated or
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
99
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
activated, refer to Status of front passenger air-
bags below.<
Before transporting a child on the front
passenger seat, read the safety precau-
tions and handling instructions under Trans-
porting children safely, refer to page 52.
The front and side airbags can also be deacti-
vated by adolescents and adults sitting in cer-
tain positions; the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbags comes on. In such cases, the
passenger should change his or her sitting
position so that the front passenger airbags are
activated and the indicator lamp goes out. If the
desired airbag status cannot be achieved by
changing the sitting position, transport the rele-
vant passenger on a rear seat. Do not attach
seat covers, seat cushion padding, ball mats or
other items to the front passenger seat unless
they are specifically recommended by BMW.
Do not place any items under the seat which
could press against the seat from below. Other-
wise, a correct analysis of the seat cushion is
not ensured.<
Status of front passenger airbags
The indicator lamp for the front passenger air-
bags shows the functional status of the front
passenger front and side airbags in accordance
with whether and how the front passenger seat
is occupied. The indicator lamp shows whether
the front passenger airbags are activated or
deactivated.
> The indicator lamp lights up when a child in
a specially designated child restraint sys-
tem is detected, as intended, on the seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Most child seats are detected by the
system, especially child seats
required by the NHTSA at the time of vehi-
cle production. After mounting a child seat,
ensure that the indicator lamp for the front
passenger airbag is lit. It indicates that the
child seat has been detected and that the
front passenger airbags are deactivated.<
> The indicator lamp does not come on as
long as a person of sufficient size and in a
correct sitting position is detected on the
seat.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are activated.
> The indicator lamp does not come on if the
seat is empty.
The front and side airbags for the front pas-
senger are not activated.
Operational readiness of airbag system
As of radio readiness, refer to page 55, the
warning lamp comes on briefly to indicate that
the entire airbag system and the belt tensioners
are operational.
Airbag system malfunction
> Warning lamp does not light up at radio
readiness or beyond.
> Warning lamp remains permanently on.
In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
have it checked without delay; otherwise,
there is the risk that the system will not function
as intended even if a sufficiently severe acci-
dent occurs.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technology for driving comfort and safety
100
Convertible: rollover
protection system
The rollover protection system is activated
automatically in the event of an accident, a crit-
ical driving situation, an extreme tilt in the car's
longitudinal axis or upon loss of ground contact.
The protection bars behind the rear head
restraints deploy within fractions of a second.
As a supplementary system to the reinforced
windshield frame, the rollover protection sys-
tem ensures that the necessary headroom is
maintained for all vehicle occupants.
Always keep the area of movement of the
rollover protection system clear.
In minor accidents, you are protected by the
fastened safety belt and, depending on acci-
dent severity, by the safety belt tensioner and
multi-phase airbag retention system.<
Resetting
If the rollover protection system was not
impacted after being automatically activated, it
can be reset by lowering the protection bars to
their original positions. This does not require
tools.
1. Push the locking lever to one side and hold
it there.
2. Push the protection bar halfway down from
above.
3. Release the locking lever.
4. Push the protection bar down until it snaps
into place.
5. Repeat the procedure for the other protec-
tion bar.
Have the rollover protection system checked
after an unexpected activation.
Never move the retractable hardtop when
the rollover protection system is in the
activated position.
Do not make any modifications to the individual
components of the rollover protection system
or its cabling.
Work on the rollover protection system should
only be performed by a BMW center.
Incorrectly performed work on the system may
lead to system failure or incorrect operation.
To check the system and ensure flawless long-
term operation, always observe the service
intervals, refer to page 80.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
101
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Lamps
Parking lamps/low beams
0 Lamps off,
daytime running lights
1 Parking lamps and daytime running lights
2 Low-beam headlamps and welcome lamps
3 Automatic headlamp control
*, daytime run-
ning lights, welcome lamps, high-beam
assistant
* and adaptive light control*
When you open the driver's door with the igni-
tion switched off, the exterior lighting is auto-
matically switched off if the light switch is in
position 0, 2 or 3.
Switch on the parking lamps if necessary,
switch position 1.
Parking lamps
In switch position 1, the front, rear and side
vehicle lighting is switched on. You can use the
parking lamps for parking.
The parking lamps will discharge the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine. It is preferable to switch on the left-
hand or right-hand roadside parking lamps,
refer to page 103.<
Low beams
The low beams light up when the light switch is
in position 2 and the ignition is on.
Automatic headlamp control*
When the switch is in position 3, the low beams
are switched on and off automatically depend-
ing on ambient light conditions, e.g. in a tunnel,
in twilight, or if there is precipitation. The adap-
tive light control
* is active. The LED next to the
symbol is illuminated when the low beams are
on. You can also activate the daytime running
lights, refer to page 102. In the situations
described above, the lamps then automatically
switch from daytime running lights to low
beams.
The headlamps may also come on when the
sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
The low beams remain switched on
regardless of the ambient lighting condi-
tions when you switch on the fog lamps.<
The automatic headlamp control cannot
serve as a substitute for your personal
judgment in determining when the lamps
should be switched on in response to ambient
lighting conditions. For example, the system
cannot detect fog or hazy weather. To avoid
safety risks, you should always switch on the
low-beam headlamps manually under these
conditions.<
Welcome lamps
If you leave the light switch in position 2 or 3
when you park the car, the parking lamps and
the interior lamps light up briefly when you
unlock the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating welcome
lamps
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Lamps
102
3. "Welcome light"
Welcome lamps are activated and are
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Pathway lighting
If you activate the headlamp flasher after
switching off the ignition with the lamps
switched off, the low beams come on and
remain on for a certain time.
Setting the duration or deactivating
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Pathway light.:"
4. Set a time of duration, or 0 s to deactivate
the function.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Daytime running lights
The daytime running lights light up in switch
position 0, 1 and 3. They are less powerful than
the low beams.
Activating/deactivating daytime
running lights
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "Daytime running lamps"
Daytime running lights are activated and
are stored for the remote control currently in
use.
Adaptive light control*
The concept
Adaptive light control is a variable headlamp
control system that enables better illumination
of the road surface. Depending on the steering
angle and other parameters, the light from the
headlamp follows the course of the road.
In tight curves at speeds up to 40 mph/70 km/h,
e.g. on mountainous roads or when turning, an
additional, corner-illuminating lamp is switched
on that lights up the inside area of the curve.
Activating Adaptive Light Control
With the ignition switched on, turn the light
switch to position 3, refer to page 101.
The corner-illuminating lamp is switched on
automatically, depending on the steering wheel
angle or turn signal indicator.
Standstill function
*: to avoid blinding oncoming
traffic, the adaptive light control directs light
towards the front passenger side when the
vehicle is at a standstill.
When you are reversing, only the corner-illumi-
nating lamps are switched on and active on
both sides.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
103
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Malfunction
The LED next to the symbol for automatic head-
lamp control flashes. Adaptive light control is
malfunctioning or has failed. Have the system
checked as soon as possible.
High beams/roadside parking
lamps
1 High beams
2 Headlamp flasher
3 Roadside parking lamps
*
Roadside parking lamps, left or right*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lamps on the side of the car facing the road
when parked.
Switching on
After parking the vehicle, press the lever up or
down beyond the pressure point for a longer
period, arrow 3.
The roadside parking lamps drain the bat-
tery. Therefore, do not leave them on for
unduly long periods of time; otherwise, the bat-
tery might not have enough power to start the
engine.<
Switching off
Press the lever in the opposite direction to the
pressure point, arrow 3.
High-beam assistant*
The concept
This system automatically switches the high
beams on and off. The procedure is controlled
by a sensor on the front of the interior rearview
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high
beams are switched on whenever the traffic sit-
uation allows. It handles this task for you and
gives you the benefit of the best possible view.
You can intervene at any time and switch the
high beams on and off as usual.
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, refer to
page 101.
2. With the low beams switched on, briefly
push the turn indicator lever in the direction
of the high beam.
The indicator lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the high beams
are activated. The system automati-
cally switches from high beams to low beams
and vice versa in response to oncoming traffic,
traffic ahead of you, and adequate ambient
lighting, e.g. on city streets.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Lamps
104
Switching the high beams on and off
manually
Whenever you wish, or when the situation
requires, you can intervene:
> If the high-beam assistant switches on the
high beams, but you would like to drive with
the low beams, simply switch off the high
beams using the turn indicator lever. This
deactivates the high-beam assistant.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn indicator lever toward the high beams
again.
> If the high-beam assistant switches on the
low beams, but you would like to drive with
the high beams, switch on the high beams
as usual. This deactivates the system and
the high beams need to be switched off
manually, if necessary.
To reactivate the system, briefly push the
turn indicator lever toward the high beams
again.
> Use the headlamp flasher as usual with the
low beams switched on.
System limitations
The high-beam assistant cannot serve as
a substitute for the driver's personal judg-
ment of when to use the high beams. Therefore,
manually switch off the high beams in situations
where this is required to avoid a safety risk.<
The system is not fully functional in situations
such as the following, and driver intervention
may be necessary:
> In very unfavorable weather conditions,
such as fog or heavy precipitation
> In detecting poorly-lit road users, such as
pedestrians, cyclists, horseback riders and
wagons; when driving close to train or ship
traffic; and at animal crossings
> In tight curves, on hilltops or in depressions,
in cross traffic or half-obscured oncoming
traffic on highways
> In poorly lit towns and cities and in the pres-
ence of highly reflective signs
> At low speeds
> When the windshield in front of the interior
rearview mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered with stickers, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Clean the sensor on
the front of the interior rearview mirror using
a cloth moistened with a small amount of
glass cleaner.
Activating via iDrive
1. "Settings"
2. "Lighting"
3. "High beam assistant"
The high-beam assistant is activated and is
stored for the remote control currently in use.
Fog lamps*
The parking lamps or low beams must
be switched on for the fog lamps to
operate. The green indicator lamp in
the instrument cluster lights up whenever the
fog lamps are on.
The fog lamps are switched off while you acti-
vate the headlamp flasher or switch on the high
beams.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
105
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
If the automatic headlamp control is acti-
vated, the low beams will come on auto-
matically when you switch on the fog lamps.<
Instrument lighting
You can adjust the brightness of the instrument
lighting only when the parking lamps or the low
beams are switched on.
1. Push button 1 up or down repeatedly until
the appropriate symbol appears in the dis-
play, accompanied by the brightness set-
ting and scale the word "SET".
2. Press button 2.
3. Push button 1 up or down to select the
desired brightness level.
4. Press button 2.
The display again shows the outside tem-
perature and the time.
Interior lamps
The interior lamps, the footwell lamps*, entry
lamps
*, cargo area lamp and courtesy lamps*
are controlled automatically.
The LEDs for the courtesy lamps
are set in the
door handles and illuminate the ground in front
of the doors.
To avoid draining the battery, all lamps
inside the car are switched off about
8 minutes after the ignition is switched off, refer
to Start/stop button on page 55.<
Switching interior lamps on/off
manually
Interior lamps, front and rear*:
To switch on and off, press the button.
To switch off the interior lamps, footwell
lamps
*, entry lamps* and courtesy lamps* per-
manently, press the button for the front interior
lamps for about 3 seconds.
Reading lamps
There are reading lamps at the front and rear*,
next to the interior lamps. To switch on and off,
press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Climate
106
Climate
1 Airflow directed toward the windshield and
side windows
2 Air to the upper body area
Draft-free ventilation 109
3 Air to the footwell
4 Air distribution, manual
5 Temperature, left side
6 Maximum cooling
7 AUTO program
8 Air volume, manual adjustment;
AUTO intensity
9 Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
10 Temperature, right side
11 ALL program
12 Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
13 Switching cooling function on/off manually
14 Rear window defroster
15 Seat heating
*, right side 47
16 Interior temperature sensor, please keep
clear
17 Seat heating
*, left side 47
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
107
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Automatic climate control
Comfortable interior climate
AUTO program 7 offers the ideal air distribution
and air volume for almost all conditions, refer to
AUTO program below. All you need to do is
select an interior temperature which is comfort-
able for you.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings.
Most settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use, refer also to Personal Profile
settings on page 26.
Adjusting air distribution manually
The air distribution can be
switched on and off manually. The
air is directed to the windshield, to
the upper body area and to the
footwell.
The automatic air distribution can be switched
back on by pressing the AUTO button. The
cooling function is switched on automatically
and the manual air distribution setting is
cleared.
Temperature
Turn to set the desired tempera-
ture.
The automatic climate control
achieves this temperature as
quickly as possible regardless of the season,
using maximum cooling or heating power if nec-
essary, and then maintains it.
Avoid rapid switching between different tem-
perature settings. The automatic climate con-
trol will not have sufficient time to adjust the set
temperature.
Maximum heating power can be obtained with
the highest setting, regardless of the outside
temperature.
The system cools steadily in the lowest setting,
regardless of the outside temperature.
Maximum cooling
Press the button.
The system is set to the lowest
temperature, maximum air volume
and recirculated-air mode.
Air flows out of the vent outlets for the upper
body region. Open them for this purpose.
Air is cooled as quickly as possible:
> Above an outside temperature of approx.
32 7/06
> When the engine is running
AUTO program
Press the button.
Air volume, air distribution and
temperature are controlled auto-
matically.
Depending on the selected temperature, AUTO
intensity and outside influences, the air is
directed toward the windshield, the side win-
dows, the upper body and the footwell.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
At the same time, a condensation sensor con-
trols the program so as to prevent window con-
densation as much as possible.
The program is switched off when the air distri-
bution is set manually or the button is pressed
again.
Intensity of the AUTO program
With the AUTO program switched on, auto-
matic control of the air volume and air distribu-
tion can be adjusted:
Press the left side of the button
to reduce the intensity. Press
the right side of the button to
increase it.
The selected intensity is shown on the display
of the automatic climate control.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Climate
108
Convertible program
The Convertible program is active when the
hardtop is open and the AUTO program is
switched on. In the Convertible program, the
automatic climate control is optimized for driv-
ing with the hardtop open. In addition, the air
volume is increased as vehicle speed increases.
The effectiveness of the Convertible pro-
gram can be enhanced considerably by
installing the wind deflector.<
Adjusting air volume manually
To be able to manually adjust the air volume,
switch off the AUTO program first.
Press the left side of the button
to reduce the air volume. Press
the right side of the button to
increase it.
The air volume may be reduced or the blower
may be switched off entirely to save on battery
power. The display remains the same.
Automatic recirculated-air control
AUC/Recirculated-air mode
You can respond to unpleasant odors or pollut-
ants in the immediate environment by tempo-
rarily suspending the supply of outside air. The
system then recirculates the air currently within
the vehicle.
Press the button repeatedly to
select an operating mode:
> LED off: outside air flows in continuously.
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: a sensor
detects pollutants in the outside air and
controls the shut-off automatically.
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode:
the supply of outside air is permanently
shut off. If the windows fog over, switch off
recirculated-air mode and increase the air
volume, if necessary. Make sure that air can
flow onto the windshield.
The recirculated-air mode should not be
used over an extended period of time;
otherwise, the air quality inside the car will dete-
riorate continuously.<
Via the button on the steering wheel
You can switch quickly between the recircu-
lated-air mode and the previous mode using a
button
on the steering wheel, refer to page 11.
ALL program
Press the button.
The current temperature setting
on the driver's side is transferred to
the front passenger side.
If the temperature setting on the driver's side is
changed, the temperature on the front passen-
ger side is changed as well.
The program is switched off when the setting is
adjusted on the front passenger side or the but-
ton is pressed again.
Defrosting windows and removing
condensation
Press the button.
Quickly removes ice and conden-
sation from the windshield and
front side windows.
For this purpose, also switch on the cooling
function.
Switching cooling function on/off
The passenger compartment can only be
cooled while the engine is running.
Press the button.
The air is cooled and dehumidified
and – depending on the tempera-
ture setting – warmed again.
Depending on the weather, the windshield may
fog up briefly when the engine is started.
Pressing the AUTO button automatically
switches on the cooling function.
Rear window defroster
Press the button.
The defroster is switched off auto-
matically after a certain time.
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
upper wires serve as an antenna and are not
part of the rear window defroster.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
109
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Switching the system on/off
Switching off
With the blower at its lowest
setting, press the left side of the
button to switch off the automatic
climate control.
All displays are cleared except for the rear win-
dow defroster if it is switched on.
The outside air supply is blocked when
the automatic climate control is switched
off. If the air quality deteriorates or the window
fogs over, switch the system back on and
increase the air volume.<
Switching on
Press any button except the ALL or the rear
window defroster button to reactivate the
automatic climate control.
Ventilation
1 Use the thumbwheels to smoothly open
and close the air vents
2 Use the lever to change the direction of the
airflow
3 Thumbwheel for more or less cool air from
the vents for the upper body area
Ventilation for cooling
Adjust the vent outlets to direct the flow of cool
air in your direction, for instance if it has become
too hot in the car.
Draft-free ventilation
Set the vent outlets so that the air flows past
you and not straight at you.
Ventilation in the rear
1 Use the thumbwheel to adjust the
temperature:
> Turn toward blue: colder
> Turn toward red: warmer
2 Use the thumbwheel to smoothly open and
close the air vents
3 Use the lever to change the direction of
the airflow
Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated-charcoal filter pro-
vides additional protection by filtering gaseous
pollutants from the outside air. Your BMW cen-
ter replaces this combined filter during routine
maintenance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Climate
110
Parked car ventilation
The concept
The parked car ventilation provides ventilation
to the passenger compartment and lowers its
temperature, if necessary. It is ready for use at
any outside temperature, as of radio readiness.
The parked car ventilation remains switched on
for approx. 30 minutes. Two different switch-on
times can be preselected. The system can also
be switched on and off directly.
Due to its high power consumption, it should
not be switched on twice in a row without driv-
ing in between to allow the battery to recharge.
The air emerges from the air vents for the upper
body area in the instrument panel. The air vents
must therefore be open.
The parked car ventilation system is operated
via iDrive.
Switching on/off directly
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate parked-car vent."
The parked car ventilation is switched on.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes.
Preselecting switch-on times
1. "Settings"
2. "Climate"
3. "Activate Timer 1" or "Activate Timer 2"
4. "Timer 1:" or "Timer 2:"
5. Turn the controller: set the hours.
6. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
7. Turn the controller: set the minutes.
8. Press the controller: the setting is
accepted.
The switch-on time is activated.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display lights up.
The symbol on the automatic climate Control
Display flashes when the system has switched
on.
The respective system is switched on
within the next 24 hours only. After these
have elapsed, it must be reactivated.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
111
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Practical interior accessories
Integrated universal remote
control*
The concept
The integrated universal remote control can
replace as many as three hand-held transmit-
ters for various remote-controlled devices,
such as garage doors and gates or lighting sys-
tems. The integrated universal remote control
registers and stores signals from the original
hand-held transmitters.
The signal of an original hand-held transmitter
can be programmed on one of the three mem-
ory buttons 1. After this, the programmed
memory button 1 will operate the system in
question. The LED 2 flashes to confirm trans-
mission of the signal.
Should you sell your vehicle one day, be sure to
delete the stored programs beforehand for your
safety, refer to page 112.
To prevent possible damage or injury,
before programming or using the inte-
grated universal remote control, always inspect
the immediate area to make certain that no peo-
ple, animals or objects are within the pivoting or
travel range of the device being operated. Com-
ply also with the safety instructions supplied
with the original hand-held transmitter.<
Checking compatibility
If this symbol appears on the package
or in the instructions supplied with the
original hand-held transmitter, you can
assume that the radio remote control device will
be compatible with the integrated universal
remote control.
For additional information, please contact your
BMW center or call: 1-800-355-3515.
You can also obtain information on the Internet
at:
www.bmwusa.com or
www.homelink.com.
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Controls, Inc.<
Programming
1 Memory buttons
2 LED
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters
1. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
2. When starting operation for the first time:
press the left and right memory buttons 1
for approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2
flashes rapidly. The three memory buttons
are cleared.
3. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
4. Simultaneously press the transmit key on
the original hand-held transmitter and the
desired memory button 1 on the integrated
universal remote control. The LED 2 flashes
slowly at first. As soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly, release both buttons. If the LED 2
does not flash rapidly after approx. 15 sec-
onds, alter the distance and repeat this
step.
5. To program other original hand-held trans-
mitters, repeat steps 3 and 4.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
112
You can operate the device while the ignition is
switched on.
If the device fails to function even after
repeated programming, check whether
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To do so, either read the
instructions for the original hand-held transmit-
ter or hold down the programmed memory
button 1 of the integrated universal remote
control. If the LED 2 on the integrated universal
remote control flashes rapidly and then remains
lit for about two seconds, the original hand-held
transmitter uses an alternating-code system. If
it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under
Alternating-code hand-held transmitters.<
Alternating-code hand-held
transmitters
To program the integrated universal remote
control, consult the operating instructions for
the device to be set. You will find information
there on the possibilities for synchronization.
When programming hand-held transmitters
that employ an alternating code, please observe
the following supplementary instructions:
Programming will be easier with the aid of
a second person.<
1. Park your vehicle within the range of the
remote-controlled device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in the section
Fixed-code hand-held transmitters.
3. Locate the button on the receiver of the
device to be set, e.g. on the drive unit.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be set. After step 4, you have
approx. 30 seconds for step 5.
5. Press the programmed memory button 1 of
the integrated universal remote control
three times.
The corresponding memory button 1 is now
programmed with the signal of the original
hand-held transmitter.
If you have any questions, please contact
your BMW center.<
Deleting all stored programs
Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
approx. 20 seconds until the LED 2 flashes rap-
idly: all stored programs are deleted.
Reassigning individual programs
1. Hold the original hand-held transmitter at a
distance of approx. 4 to 12 in/10 to 30 cm
from the memory buttons 1.
The required distance between the
hand-held transmitter and the mem-
ory buttons 1 depends on the system of the
respective original hand-held transmitter
used.<
2. Press the desired memory button 1 of the
integrated universal remote control.
3. If the LED 2 flashes slowly after approx.
20 seconds, press the transmit key of the
original hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons as soon as the LED 2 flashes
rapidly. If the LED 2 does not flash rapidly
after approx. 15 seconds, alter the distance
and repeat this step.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
113
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Digital compass*
1 Adjustment button
2 Display
The display shows you the main or secondary
compass direction in which you are driving.
Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
the adjustment button with a pointed object
such as a ballpoint pen or similar item. The fol-
lowing adjustment options are displayed one
after the other, depending on how long you
keep the adjustment button pressed:
> Press briefly: switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: set compass zone
> 6 to 9 seconds: calibrate compass
> 9 to 12 seconds: set left-hand/right-hand
steering
> 12 to 15 seconds: set the language
Setting compass zones
Set the compass zone corresponding to your
vehicle's geographic location so that the com-
pass can function correctly; refer to the world
map with compass zones.
To set the compass zone, press the adjustment
button for approx. 3-4 seconds. The number of
the compass zone set is shown in the display.
To change the zone setting, briefly press the
adjustment button repeatedly until the display
shows the number of the compass zone corre-
sponding to your current location.
The compass is operational again after
approx. 10 seconds.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
114
Calibrating the digital compass
The digital compass must be calibrated in the
following situations:
> An incorrect compass direction is shown.
> The compass direction shown does not
change although the direction of travel
does.
> Not all compass directions are shown.
Procedure
1. Make sure that no large metal objects or
overhead power lines are in the vicinity of
your vehicle and that you have enough
space to drive in a circle.
2. Set the currently valid compass zone.
3. Convertible: ensure that the retractable
hardtop is fully closed.
4. Press the adjustment button for approx. 6-7
seconds to call up C. Then drive in at least
one full circle at a speed of no more than
4mph or 7km/h.
If calibration is successful, the display
changes from C to a compass direction.
5. Convertible: open the retractable hardtop
fully and repeat step 4.
Setting right-hand/left-hand steering
Your digital compass is factory-set to right-
hand or left-hand steering, in accordance with
your vehicle.
Set the language
You can set the language of the display:
Press the adjustment button for approx.
12-13 seconds. Briefly press the adjustment
button again to switch between English, "E",
and German, "O".
The setting is automatically saved after approx.
10 seconds.
Coupe:
Roller sun blind*
Tap the button in the center console to raise or
lower the roller sun blind.
Glove compartment
Opening
Pull the handle.
The light in the glove compartment comes on.
To prevent injury in the event of an acci-
dent while the vehicle is being driven,
close the glove compartment immediately after
use.<
Closing
Fold the cover up.
Locking
To lock the glove compartment, use the inte-
grated key of the remote control, refer to
page 26.
Convertible: when you lock the vehicle from the
outside, the glove compartment is locked as
well.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
115
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
USB interface for data transmission
Port for importing and exporting data on USB
devices, e.g. music collections, refer to
page 176.
Observe the following when connecting:
> Do not use force when plugging the con-
nector into the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB interface to recharge
external devices.
Center armrest
Storage compartment
The center armrest between the front seats
contains either a compartment or the cover for
the snap-in adapter
*, depending on the equip-
ment version.
Opening
Press the button, see arrow.
Settings*
Slide the center armrest on the driver's side into
the desired position.
Connection for external audio device
You can connect an external audio device such
as a CD or MP3 player and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system:
> AUX-IN port, refer to page 177
> USB audio interface
*/additional connection
of the music player in the mobile phone
*,
refer to page 178
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
116
Storage compartments inside
the vehicle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, you
will find compartments beside the steering col-
umn
*, in the front doors and in the center con-
sole
*.
There are nets
* on the front-seat backrests.
Storage compartments in the rear
console
Depending on your vehicle's equipment ver-
sion, the following storage compartments can
be found in the rear console:
> Storage tray
> Storage compartment with cover
> Cupholders
Coupe: clothes hooks
Press the upper edge to flip open.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks; other-
wise, they could endanger the car's occupants,
e.g. in case of heavy braking or sudden
swerving.<
Cupholders
Use lightweight and shatterproof contain-
ers and do not transport hot beverages;
otherwise, there is an increased risk of injury in
the event of the accident. Do not force contain-
ers that are too large into the cupholders; other-
wise, damage could result.<
Front
Opening
Briefly press the center of the cover.
Closing
Briefly press the cover in the center and push in
the cupholder.
Coupe: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
center armrest.
Press the front of the armrest.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
117
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible: rear
There are two additional cupholders in the rear
console.
Press the button to open.
Before folding down the rear seat back-
rest or using the transport bag, remove all
containers from the cupholder and close it. Do
not place objects into the cupholder and use
force to close it. Do not use the cupholder as a
grab handle.<
Ashtray*
Opening
Push the ridge on the cover.
Emptying
Lift out the insert.
Lighter
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The lighter can be pulled out as soon as it pops
back out.
Hold or touch the hot cigarette lighter by
the knob only. Holding or touching it in
other areas could result in burns.
When leaving the car, always remove the
remote control so that children cannot operate
the cigarette lighter and burn themselves.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
118
Connecting electrical
appliances
In your BMW, when the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on, you can use electrical
devices such as a hand lamp, car vacuum
cleaner, etc., up to approx. 200 watts at
12 volts, as long as one of the following sockets
is available. Avoid damaging the sockets by
attempting to insert plugs of unsuitable shape
or size.
Cigarette lighter socket*
To access the socket: take the cigarette lighter
out of the socket.
Socket* in the front passenger footwell
A socket is located under the glove compart-
ment on the left.
Socket in the center armrest
External audio device, refer to page 115.
Coupe: socket in the cargo area*
Open the cap.
Coupe:
Through-loading system*
Opening
1. To release the rear seat backrest, pull the
corresponding lever in the cargo area.
2. The unlocked rear seat backrest moves for-
ward slightly. Fold the backrest forward by
the head restraint.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to its upright posi-
tion and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's lock-
ing mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
The lashing eyes in the cargo area provide you
with a way to attach cargo area nets
* or draw
straps for securing suitcases and luggage, refer
to page 130.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
119
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Convertible:
Cargo loading
Enlarging the cargo area
When the hardtop is closed you can enlarge the
cargo area:
To do so, push the cargo area partition upward.
Before opening the hardtop, push the cargo
area partition down until it engages on both
sides.
Before moving the hardtop, ensure that
there are no objects on or next to the
cargo area partition; otherwise, parts of the
hardtop may be damaged. Do not exceed the
maximum loading height; refer to the sticker in
the cargo area showing a line indicating the
maximum height. Do not use force to push
down the cargo area partition.<
The retractable hardtop can only be
opened if the cargo area partition is in its
lowermost position and engaged on both
sides.<
Folding down the rear seat backrest
Opening
You can fold down the rear seat backrest to
transport light objects in the rear without dam-
aging the seats. Depending on the vehicle
equipment, the mounting points for the cargo
area net
* are found on the back of the seat
backrest. To unlock the rear seat backrest:
press the button on the driver's or the opposite
side.
Closing
Return the rear seat backrest to the upright
seating position and engage it.
When returning the backrest to its seating
position, make sure that the seat's lock-
ing mechanism engages properly. Otherwise,
cargo could be thrown around in the event of
sharp braking or swerving and endanger the
occupants.<
Bag holder*
When the rear seat backrest is folded down, you
will find two bag holders on the cargo area wall:
1. Fold open the holder by pressing the but-
ton.
2. Press the handles of the bag onto the
holder from above.
Only hang light shopping bags or other
suitable objects from the holders; other-
wise, braking maneuvers and swerving, for
example, may lead to a safety hazard due to
objects flying about the passenger compart-
ment. Only transport heavy luggage in the
cargo area if it has been appropriately
secured.<
For more information on loading the vehicle,
refer to page 129.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
120
Storage compartment behind the
rear seat backrest
A storage compartment is located behind the
rear seat backrest. To access the storage com-
partment: remove the insert or fold down the
rear seat backrest.
When the rear seat backrest is folded
down or the insert has been removed,
only transport small light objects in the storage
compartment; otherwise, braking maneuvers
and swerving, for example, may lead to a safety
hazard due to objects flying about the passen-
ger compartment. Only transport heavy lug-
gage in the cargo area if it has been appropri-
ately secured.<
Storage compartments inside
the cargo area
Coupe
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Left storage compartment, e.g. for storing a
box of cleaning tissues or up to 12 CD jack-
ets, depending on vehicle equipment ver-
sion
> Net
* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Hooks for hanging up, e.g., shopping bags
or tote bags
> Rubber strap on the left trim panel for
securing small objects such as a folding
umbrella
> Net for small objects on the right trim panel
of the cargo area
Convertible
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the
following storage spaces can be found in the
cargo area:
> Storage compartment on the left side of the
cargo area. To open turn handle by 90°
> Net
* for securing smaller objects, to be
attached to the fixtures on the floor panel
> Rubber strap
* for subdividing the cargo
area; can be hooked onto the lateral lashing
eyes
> Stowage compartment under the floor
panel
Folding up the floor panel
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
load of 55 lbs/25 kg for the storage com-
partment under the floor panel; otherwise, dam-
age could result.<
Coupe
Press the floor panel up and secure it with the
catch.
Convertible
To lift, grab hold of the floor panel at the open-
ing at the rear of the panel.
Lashing eyes
You will find lashing eyelets in the cargo area for
securing luggage items with nets or tensioning
straps, refer to page 130.
Coupe: ski bag*
The ski bag is designed for safe, clean transport
of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up to
2snowboards.
With the ski bag you can stow skis with a length
of up to 6.9 ft 10 in/2.10 m. When skis of 6.9 ft
10 in/2.10 m length are loaded, the overall
capacity of the ski bag is reduced due to its
tapered design.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
121
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Loading
1. Fold down the center armrest.
2. Press the button, reach into the recess and
fold down the cover.
3. Open the Velcro fastener, spread the ski
bag between the front seats and insert the
skis or snowboards.
The zip fastener makes objects in the ski
bag easier to reach.
4. Clip the hooks of the ski bag retaining strap
into the eyelet.
Only place clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap sharp
edges to prevent damage.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the ski bag and its con-
tents. Tighten the retaining strap on the ten-
sioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the ski bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Removing the ski bag
The ski bag can be completely removed, e.g. for
faster drying or to allow you to use other inserts.
1. Fold down the center panel in the rear seat
backrest.
2. Pull the handle, arrow 1.
3. Pull out the insert, arrow 2.
For more information on the various
inserts available, contact your BMW cen-
ter.<
Convertible: through-loading
opening with integrated
transport bag*
The transport bag is designed for safe, clean
transport of up to 4 pairs of standard skis or up
to 2 snowboards.
When the rear seat backrest is folded up, you
can remove the insert and use the transport bag
with the regular through-loading opening. To
transport larger objects, you can fold down the
rear seat backrest to create an expanded
through-loading opening.
With the transport bag you can stow skis with a
length of up to 6.2 ft/1.90 m. When skis of 6.2 ft/
1.90 m length are loaded, the overall capacity of
the transport bag is reduced due to its tapered
design.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Practical interior accessories
122
Loading
1. For loading using the regular through-load-
ing opening:
Press the button down and remove the
insert from the front.
For loading with the through-loading open-
ing expanded:
Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer to
page 119.
2. Front cover: press the two recesses
together and fold the cover down until it
engages.
3. In the cargo area: press the two recesses
together and fold down the cover.
4. Undo the Velcro fastener and spread out
the transport bag between the front seats.
5. Insert the latch plate of the retaining strap
into the belt buckle under the transport bag.
6. Load the transport bag. The zipper eases
access to the stored items.
Only place clean skis in the transport bag. Wrap
sharp edges to prevent damage.
You can use the snaps to shorten the transport
bag if you do not need its full length.
Securing cargo
After loading, secure the transport bag and its
contents. Tighten the retaining strap on the
tensioning buckle for this purpose.
Secure the transport bag in the manner
described; otherwise, it could endanger
the car's occupants, e.g. in case of heavy brak-
ing or sudden swerving.<
To store the transport bag, perform the steps
described for loading in reverse order.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Controls
123
Reference At a glanceDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Removing the front cover
You can remove the front cover to use the full
height of the through-loading opening. With the
cover folded down, pull the handle, see arrow,
and remove the cover toward the front. To
replace, insert the cover at an angle from above
and let it snap it into place.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving tips
This section provides you with information
useful in dealing with specific driving and
operating conditions.
Driving tips
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
126
Things to remember when driving
Break-in period
Moving parts need breaking-in time to adjust to
each other. Please follow the instructions below
in order to achieve the optimal service life and
economy of operation for your vehicle.
Engine and differential
Always obey all official speed limits.
Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Drive at varying engine and road speeds, but do
not exceed an engine speed of 4,500 rpm or a
road speed of 100 mph/160 km/h.
Avoid full-throttle operation and use of the
transmission's kickdown mode.
After driving 1,200 miles/2,000 km
Engine and vehicle speeds can be gradually
increased.
Tires
Due to technical factors associated with their
manufacture, tires do not achieve their full trac-
tion potential until after an initial break-in
period. Therefore, drive cautiously during the
first 200 miles/300 km.
Brake system
Brakes require an initial break-in period of
approx. 300 miles/500 km to achieve optimized
contact and wear patterns between brake pads
and rotors. Drive cautiously during this break-in
period.
Clutch
The function of the clutch reaches its optimal
level only after a distance driven of approx.
300 miles/500 km. During this break-in period,
engage the clutch gently.
Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be
observed if any of the components mentioned
above have to be renewed in the course of the
vehicle's operating life.
Saving fuel
The fuel consumption of your vehicle depends
on several factors. You can lower fuel consump-
tion and the environmental impact by taking
certain measures, adjusting your driving style
and having the vehicle serviced regularly.
Remove any unneeded cargo
Additional weight increases fuel consumption.
Remove any mounted parts after you
have finished using them
Remove unneeded additional mirrors, the roof
rack and the rear luggage rack after use.
Mounted parts affect the vehicle's aerodynam-
ics and increase fuel consumption.
Close the windows and glass roof
An open glass roof or window causes higher air
resistance and thus increases fuel consump-
tion.
Check tire inflation pressure regularly
Check the tire inflation pressure at least twice a
month and before embarking on a long journey,
and correct it if necessary.
Low tire inflation pressure causes higher rolling
resistance and thus increases fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Set off immediately
Do not let the engine warm up while the car is
still standing, but set off immediately at moder-
ate engine speed. This is the fastest way for the
cold engine to reach its operating temperature.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving tips
127
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Drive defensively
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and braking
maneuvers. To do so, keep an adequate dis-
tance between you and the vehicle in front of
you. A defensive and smooth driving style
keeps fuel consumption down.
Avoid high engine speeds
Only use first gear when setting off. In second
and higher gears, accelerate without hesitation
or pauses. When accelerating, shift up before
reaching high engine speeds.
When you reach the desired speed, shift into
the highest applicable gear and drive with the
engine speed as low as possible and at a con-
stant speed.
As a rule: driving at low engine speeds lowers
fuel consumption and reduces wear.
Coasting
When approaching a red light, take your foot off
the accelerator and coast to a stop in the high-
est applicable gear.
On a downhill slope, take your foot off the accel-
erator and coast in a suitable gear.
The fuel supply is interrupted when coasting.
Switch off the engine during lengthy
stops
Switch off the engine when stopping for lengthy
periods, e.g. at traffic lights, railroad crossings
or in traffic congestions. You achieve fuel sav-
ings even if standing time is as short as approx.
4 seconds.
Switch off functions you do not need at
the moment
Functions such as the air conditioner, seat
heating or rear window defroster draw large
amounts of power and consume additional fuel.
Especially in city traffic and in stop and go driv-
ing they have a considerable impact. Therefore,
switch these functions off when they are not
really needed.
Have the vehicle serviced
Have the vehicle serviced regularly to achieve
good economy and a long vehicle life. BMW
recommends having the vehicle serviced at a
BMW center. Also note the BMW service sys-
tem, refer to page 227.
General driving notes
Close the trunk lid
Operate the vehicle only when the trunk
lid is closed. Otherwise, exhaust fumes
could enter the interior of the vehicle.<
If the vehicle must be driven with the trunk lid
open:
1. Close all windows and the glass roof.
2. Greatly increase the air volume of the auto-
matic climate control system, refer to
page 108.
Hot exhaust system
In all vehicles, extremely high tempera-
tures are generated in the exhaust sys-
tem. Do not remove the heat shields installed
adjacent to various sections of the exhaust sys-
tem, and never apply undercoating to them.
When driving, standing at idle and while park-
ing, take care to avoid possible contact
between the hot exhaust system and any highly
flammable materials such as hay, leaves, grass,
etc. Such contact could lead to a fire, with the
risk of serious personal injuries and property
damage. Do not touch hot exhaust tail pipes.
Otherwise, there is a risk of burns.<
Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads,
reduce road speed. If you do not, a wedge
of water can form between tires and road sur-
face. This situation, known as hydroplaning,
means that the tire can completely lose contact
with the road surface, so that neither the car can
be steered nor the brake be properly applied.<
The risk of hydroplaning increases with declin-
ing tread depth on the tires, refer also to Mini-
mum tread depth on page 219.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
128
Driving through water
Drive through water on the road only if it is
not deeper than 1 ft/30 cm, and then only
at walking speed at the most. Otherwise, the
vehicle's engine, the electrical systems and the
transmission may be damaged.<
Use the parking brake on inclines
On inclines, do not hold the vehicle for a
lengthy period using the clutch; use the
parking brake instead. Otherwise, greater
clutch wear will result.<
For more information about the drive-off assis-
tant, refer to page 92.
Braking safely
Your BMW is equipped with ABS as a standard
feature. Applying the brakes fully is the most
effective way of braking in situations in which
this is necessary. Since the vehicle maintains
steering responsiveness, you can still avoid
possible obstacles with a minimum of steering
effort.
Pulsation of the brake pedal, combined with
sounds from the hydraulic circuits, indicate that
ABS is in its active mode.
Driving in wet conditions
When roads are wet or there is heavy rain,
briefly exert gentle pressure on the brake pedal
every few miles. Monitor traffic conditions to
ensure that this maneuver does not endanger
other road users. The heat generated in this
process helps dry the pads and rotors to ensure
that full braking efficiency will then be available
when you need it.
Hills
To prevent overheating and the resulting
reduced efficiency of the brake system,
drive long or steep downhill gradients in the
gear in which the least braking is required. Even
light but consistent brake pressure can lead to
high temperatures, brake wear and possibly
even brake failure.<
You can increase the engine's braking effect by
shifting down, all the way to first gear if neces-
sary. This strategy helps you avoid placing
excessive loads on the brake system. Down-
shifting in manual mode of the automatic trans-
mission, refer to page 59.
Sports automatic transmission with dou-
ble clutch: never drive with the transmis-
sion in neutral or with the engine switched off;
otherwise, there will be no engine braking
action and no power assistance to the brakes
and steering.
Manual transmission: never drive with the
clutch held down, with the transmission in neu-
tral or with the engine switched off; otherwise,
engine braking action will not be present or
there will be no power assistance to the brakes
or steering.
Never allow floor mats, carpets or any other
objects to protrude into the area around the
pedals; otherwise, pedal function could be
impaired.<
Corrosion on brake rotors
When the vehicle is driven only occasionally,
during extended periods when the vehicle is not
used at all, and in operating conditions where
brake applications are less frequent, there is an
increased tendency for corrosion to form on
rotors, while contaminants accumulate on the
brake pads. This occurs because the minimum
pressure which must be exerted by the pads
during brake applications to clean the rotors is
not reached.
Should corrosion form on the brake rotors, the
brakes will tend to respond with a pulsating
effect that even extended application will fail to
cure.
When the vehicle is parked
Condensation forms while the automatic cli-
mate control is in operation, and then exits
under the vehicle. Traces of condensed water
under the vehicle are therefore normal.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving tips
129
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Cargo loading
To avoid loading the tires beyond their
approved carrying capacity, never over-
load the vehicle. Overloading can lead to over-
heating and increases the rate at which damage
develops inside the tires. In some situations,
this can result in sudden loss of tire pressure.<
Make sure that no liquids are spilled or
leak from their containers in the cargo
area, as this could result in damage to the vehi-
cle.<
Determining loading limit
1. Locate the following statement on your
vehicle's placard
*:
The combined weight of occupants
and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or YYY lbs. Otherwise, overloading
can result in damage to the vehicle and
unstable driving conditions.<
2. Determine the combined weight of the
driver and passengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kilograms or YYY
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the YYY amount equals
1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150-lb. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs:
1,400 lbs. minus 750 lbs. = 650 lbs.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated
in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, part of
the load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult the manual for
transporting a trailer to determine how this
may reduce the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Load
The permissible load is the total of the weight of
occupants and cargo/luggage. The greater the
weight of the occupants, the less cargo/lug-
gage can be transported.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Things to remember when driving
130
Stowing cargo
> Position heavy objects as low and as far for-
ward as possible, ideally directly behind the
respective seat backrests.
> Cover sharp edges and corners.
> For very heavy cargo when the rear seat is
not occupied, secure each safety belt in the
opposite buckle.
Coupe
Convertible
Securing cargo
Coupe
Convertible
> Secure smaller and lighter items using
retaining straps, a cargo area net
* or draw
straps
*.
> Heavy-duty cargo straps
* for securing
larger and heavier objects are available at
your BMW center. Four lashing eyes are
provided for attaching the cargo straps.
Two are located on the cargo area
sidewalls 1, two more are on the rear cargo
area panel 2.
Please comply with the information sup-
plied with the cargo straps.
Convertible: before opening the hardtop,
fold down the cargo area partition. Make
sure the cargo area is loaded correctly; other-
wise parts of the hardtop can be damaged, refer
to page 119.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Driving tips
131
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Always position and secure the cargo as
described above, so that it cannot endan-
ger the car's occupants, for example if sudden
braking or swerving is necessary.
Never exceed either the approved gross vehicle
weight or either of the approved axle loads, refer
to page 249; otherwise, excessive loads can
pose a safety hazard, and may also place you in
violation of traffic safety laws.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be thrown
around, for example as a result of heavy braking,
sudden swerves, etc., and endanger the occu-
pants.
Only attach the cargo straps using the lashing
eyes shown in the illustration. Do not secure
cargo with the anchors for tether straps, refer to
page 53; otherwise, these could be damaged.<
Coupe: roof-mounted
luggage rack*
A special rack system is available as an option
for your BMW. Comply with the directions given
in the installation instructions.
Mounting points
The mounting points are located in the roof.
Loading roof-mounted luggage rack
Because roof racks raise the vehicle's center of
gravity when loaded, they have a major effect on
vehicle handling and steering response.
You should therefore always remember not to
exceed the approved roof load capacity, the
approved gross vehicle weight or the axle loads
when loading the rack.
You can find the applicable data under Weights
on page 249.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too large in area. Heavy items
should always be placed at the bottom. Be sure
that adequate clearance is maintained for rais-
ing the glass roof, and that objects do not
project into the opening path of the trunk lid.
Fasten roof-mounted cargo correctly and
securely to prevent it from shifting or falling off
during the trip.
Drive smoothly. Avoid sudden acceleration and
braking maneuvers. Take corners gently.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can
enter destinations and specify your route
so that your navigation system guides you
reliably to your destination.
Navigation
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation system
134
Navigation system
General information
With the help of satellites and vehicle sensors,
the navigation system is able to ascertain the
precise position of the vehicle and reliably guide
you to any destination you enter.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Failure to take to this precaution
can place you in violation of the law and put
vehicle occupants and other road users in dan-
ger.<
Navigation data
General information
Navigation data are stored in the vehicle and
can be updated.
Navigation data and authorization codes are
available from your BMW center.
Depending on the data volume, a data update
may take several hours.
> The data are updated while you are driving.
> The update is resumed automatically when
a trip is continued after an interruption.
> Basic navigation functions are available
during the trip.
> The data are stored in the vehicle.
> After the update, the system restarts.
> The medium that holds the navigation data
can be removed after the update is com-
pleted.
Updating the navigation data
Inserting navigation DVD
1. Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD
player with the labeled side facing up.
2. Follow the instructions on the
Control Display.
3. Enter the authorization code of the naviga-
tion DVD and change the DVD if needed.
Removing navigation DVD
1. Press button 1.
The DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
2. Remove the DVD.
Information about navigation data
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Navigation system version":
Information on the data version is displayed.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
135
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Destination entry
In entering your destination you can select from
the following options:
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Selecting destination from address book,
refer to page 137
> Last destinations, refer to page 138
> Special destinations, refer to page 139
> Entering a destination on the map, refer to
page 140
> Selecting home address, refer to page 138
> Entering a destination by voice com-
mands*, refer to page 141
> Destination entry via BMW Assist
*, refer to
page 140
You can also store a navigation destination on
the programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20.
Enter data only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary, and always give priority to the
applicable traffic regulations in the event of any
contradiction between traffic and road condi-
tions and the instructions issued by the naviga-
tion system. Otherwise, vehicle occupants and
other road users may be endangered.<
Entering a destination
manually
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of streets or
towns, refer to page 143. This allows you to
enter different spellings and completes your
entry automatically, so that stored names can
be called up quickly.
1. Press the MENU button.
2. "Navigation"
3. "Enter address"
The system also supports you with the follow-
ing features:
> If you do not enter a street, the system
will guide you to the downtown area of
atown or city.
> You can skip the entry of state/province and
town/city if the current entries should be
retained for your new destination.
Entering a state/province
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "State/Province" or the displayed
state/province.
Entering a town/city
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select letters, if necessary.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination entry
136
To delete letters:
> To delete individual letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller.
> To delete all letters:
Turn the controller to select , and
then press the controller for an extended
period.
To enter spaces:
> Select the symbol.
The list gradually grows smaller each time
you enter a new letter.
3. Move the controller to the right.
4. Select the name of the town/city from the
list.
If there are several towns/cities with the same
name:
1. Change to the list of town/city names.
2. Highlight the town/city: a preview map is
displayed.
3. Select the town/city.
Entering the postal code
1. Select "Town/City/Postal Code" or the dis-
played town/city.
2. Select the symbol.
3. Select the digits.
4. Change to the list of postal codes and
towns/cities.
5. Highlight the postal code: a preview map is
displayed.
6. Select the postal code.
Entering street and intersection
1. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
2. Enter a street and intersection as you would
the town/city.
After the street you can also enter the intersec-
tion or the house number.
If there are several streets with the same name:
1. Change to the list of street names.
2. Highlight the street: a preview map is dis-
played.
3. Select the street.
Entering a street without a destination
town/city
You can also enter a street without specifying a
town/city. In this case, all streets of the same
name in the designated state/province are
offered. The corresponding town/city is dis-
played after the street name.
If a town/city has already been entered, you can
negate this entry. This could be helpful in
instances where the desired street does not
exist in the entered town/city because it
belongs to another suburb, for example.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select "Street" or the displayed street.
4. Change to the list of street names.
5. Select "In" with the state/province currently
displayed.
6. Select the letters.
7. Change to the list of street names.
8. Highlight the street: a preview map
is displayed.
9. Select the street.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
137
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Entering a house number
You can enter any house number stored in the
navigation data for the street.
1. "House number"
2. Select the digits.
3. Change to the list of house numbers.
4. Select a house number or range of house
numbers.
Starting destination guidance after
entering the destination
1. "Accept destination"
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
> Set your "Route preference",
refer to page 144.
> Search for "Points of Interest at loc.",
refer to page 139.
Address book
To create contacts, refer to page 196.
Selecting a destination from the
address book
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
Contacts with addresses are displayed if
these have been checked as destinations.
If the contacts with addresses from the
mobile phone
* are not displayed, they first
need to be checked as destinations, refer to
page. 197.
3. Select a contact from the list or, if neces-
sary, using "A-Z search".
4. If necessary, select "Business address" or
"Home address".
Storing a destination in the address
book
Store the destination in the address book after
entering the destination.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
3. Select an existing contact, if available.
4. Select "Business address" or "Home
address".
5. Enter "Last name" and, if necessary, "First
name".
6. "Store in vehicle"
Storing the position
Your current position can be stored in the
address book.
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store position as contact" or "Add position
to contact".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination entry
138
4. Depending on the selection, select an exist-
ing contact from the list or the type of
address and enter the last and first name.
5. "Store in vehicle"
Editing or deleting an address
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. Highlight the entry.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit in Contacts" or "Delete entry".
Using the home address as a
destination
The home address must be stored as a destina-
tion. Refer to Specifying a contact as the home
address, page 196.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Address book"
3. "Home"
4. "Start guidance"
Last destinations
The last destinations are stored automatically.
These destinations can be called up and used
as a destination for destination guidance.
Opening the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Start guidance"
Editing a destination
Destinations can be edited, for example, to
change the house number of an existing entry.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Edit destination"
Deleting the last destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Last destinations"
3. Highlight the destination.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry" or "Delete all last destina-
tions".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
139
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Special destinations
You can search for a special destination, e.g. a
hotel or place of interest, and start destination
guidance to the corresponding location.
The scope of information provided
depends on the particular set of naviga-
tion data you are using.<
Opening the search for special
destinations
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
The search can be narrowed by entering the
location and type of special destination.
Special destination location
Search for a special destination according to its
location relative to a locality or route.
1. "Search area"
2. Select the location where the system is to
search for the special destination:
> "At current location"
> "At destination"
> "At a different destination"
> "Along route"
Special destination category
1. "Category"
2. Select "All" or a specific category, e.g.
hotels or restaurants.
Category details
For some special destinations, additional
details can be displayed that are available in the
navigation data, e.g. Italian-style restaurant.
"Category details"
Starting the search for special
destinations
1. "Start search"
2. A list of the special destinations is dis-
played.
> "At current location"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the current loca-
tion and are displayed with a directional
arrow pointing to the destination.
> "At destination", "At a different destina-
tion", "Along route"
Special destinations are listed according
to their distance from the location where
the search is being performed.
> Destinations of the selected category
are displayed in the map view as sym-
bols. The display depends on the map
scale and the category.
3. Highlight a special destination: the destina-
tion is displayed in the preview map.
4. Select the special destination.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
If a phone number is available, a connection
can be established, if desired.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination entry
140
Destination entry via BMW Assist*
A connection is established to the BMW Con-
cierge service, refer to page 199.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Open "Options".
4. "BMW Assist dest. entry"
Entering special destinations by name
1. "Navigation"
2. "Points of Interest"
3. "Name, A-Z search"
4. Enter the letters.
Depending on the distance, the search may
take some time. The list can contain a max-
imum of 100 entries.
5. Change to the list of special destinations.
6. Highlight a special destination: the destina-
tion is displayed in the preview map.
7. Select the special destination.
8. Select the symbol.
9. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Displaying special destinations in the
map
To display symbols of the special destinations
in the map:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display Points of Interest"
5. Select the settings.
Entering the destination via
the map
If you only know the location of the town or
street, you can enter the destination using the
map.
Opening the map
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
A map section is displayed on the Control Dis-
play. The map shows the current position of the
vehicle.
Selecting the destination
1. Select the symbol.
"Interactive map" is started.
2. Select the destination with the cross-hairs.
> To change the scale: turn the controller.
> To shift the map: move the controller in
the required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the
controller in the required direction and
turn it.
3. Press the controller to display additional
menu items.
> Select the symbol: "Start guidance"
or "Add as another dest.".
> "Return": return to the map view.
> "Find points of interest": the search for
special destinations is begun.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
141
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Specifying the street
If the system cannot recognize a street, it dis-
plays a street name in the vicinity or the coordi-
nates of the destination.
Interactive map
In the interactive map, the scale can be adjusted
and the visible map section can be shifted. In
addition, pressing the controller makes further
functions available:
> Select that symbol and "Start guid-
ance", if necessary.
> "Exit interactive map"
> Map view
> "Display destination"
The map section around the destination
is displayed.
> "Display current location"
The map section around your current
location is displayed.
> "Find points of interest", refer to
page 139.
Entering a destination by
voice commands*
General information
You can enter a desired destination via the
voice activation system. During the destination
input, you can switch between voice entry and
entry via iDrive at any time. To do so, reactivate
the voice activation system if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud via {Voice commands}.<
Saying the entries
> Countries, towns and cities, streets and
intersections can be said as whole words or
spelled in the system language, refer to
page 87.
Example: to enter a destination in a US state
as a complete word, the system language
must be English.
> The town/city, street and house number
can be said as a single sentence.
*
> Spell the entry if the language region and
the system language differ.
> Say the letters smoothly, and avoid exag-
gerating the pronunciation and inserting
lengthy pauses between the letters.
Entering an address*
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
3. Wait for a request from the system.
4. Say the town or city, street and house num-
ber in a single sentence.
5. Continue making the entry as prompted by
the system.
6. If necessary, individually name the separate
components of the address, e.g. the town/
city.
Entering a town/city
The town/city can be spelled or entered as a
complete word
*.
The methods of entry depend on the nav-
igation data in use and the country and
language settings.<
2. Wait for the system to prompt you for the
town/city.
3. Say the name of the town/city, or name at
least the first three letters.
2. {Enter address}
1. {City} or {Spell city}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination entry
142
Depending on the entry, up to 20 towns/cit-
ies may be suggested.
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
compiled in a separate list and shown as a town/
city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry with {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city from that list.<
The town/city can also be selected from the list
via iDrive: turn the controller until the town/city
is selected and press the controller.
Entering a street or intersection
The street or intersection is entered in the same
manner as the town/city.
Entering a house number
You can enter house numbers up to 999:
Starting destination guidance
Destination guidance starts immediately.
Adding further intermediate
destinations
Further intermediate destinations can be
added.
Storing destinations
The destination is automatically added to the
list of last destinations.
Planning a trip
New trip
Various intermediate destinations can be
entered for a trip.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol.
5. "Enter new destination"
6. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
7. Enter the intermediate destination.
8. "Start guidance"
Enter the intermediate destination
A maximum of 30 intermediate destinations can
be entered for one trip.
1. "Enter new destination"
2. Select the type of destination entry and
enter the intermediate destination.
3. Select "Add as another dest.".
4. Select the location where the intermediate
destination is to be inserted.
4. Select a location:
> To select a recommended town/city:
{Yes}
> To select other town/city: {New
entry}
> To select an entry: e.g. {Entry 2}
> To spell an entry: {Spell city}
1. {House number}
2. Say the house number.
3. {Yes} to confirm the house number.
4. {Accept destination}
{Start guidance}
{Add as another destination}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
143
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Starting the trip
After all intermediate destinations have been
entered:
"Start guidance"
Storing a trip
Up to 30 created trips can be stored in the trip
list.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Store trip"
3. Enter the letters.
4. "OK"
The trip is stored in the trip list under the
entered name.
Starting a stored trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. "Start guidance"
Trips, changing
Changing the trip direction
Intermediate destinations can be displayed in
reverse order after destination guidance is
started.
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Reverse order of trip dest."
Rearranging the intermediate
destinations
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Reposition dest. in the trip"
Deleting an intermediate destination
1. "Map"
2. "Guidance"
3. "Display all trip destinations"
4. Select an intermediate destination.
5. "Delete dest. in the trip"
Deleting a trip
1. "Navigation"
2. "Stored trips"
3. Select the desired trip.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete all trips" or "Delete trip".
Word-matching principle
The system's word-matching principle makes it
easier for you to enter the names of towns or
streets. The system runs ongoing checks, com-
paring your destination entries with the data
stored in the vehicle as the basis for instant
response. The benefits for you include:
> Names of towns entered may differ from the
official versions if you are using a spelling
that is customary in another country.
Example:
Instead of the German spelling "München"
you can also enter the English spelling
"Munich" or the Italian spelling "Monaco".
> When you are entering the names of towns
and streets the system will complete them
automatically as soon as enough letters are
available to ensure unambiguous identifica-
tion.
> The system offers only those letters for
selection of name entries that are stored in
the vehicle. Thus, entry of erroneous or
unregistered names is impossible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination guidance
144
Destination guidance
Starting destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Enter address"
3. Select the destination.
4. "Accept destination"
5. "Start guidance"
The route is displayed on the Control Display
after it is calculated.
In the map view, the distance from the destina-
tion/intermediate destination and the estimated
arrival time are displayed.
Terminating destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Stop guidance"
Continuing destination
guidance
If the destination was not reached during the
last trip, destination guidance can be resumed.
"Resume guidance"
Route criteria
General information
You can influence the calculated route by
choosing certain route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination entry or during destination guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
whether it is a highway or a winding road. As a
result, the routes recommended by the naviga-
tion system may not always be the same ones
that you would choose based on personal expe-
rience.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Changing route criteria
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. "Route preference"
4. Selecting a criterion:
> "Fast route": time-optimized route,
which is a combination of the shortest
possible distance and the fastest roads
> "Efficient route": optimized combination
of the fastest roads and shortest route
> "Short route": short distance without
taking time into account
> "Alternative routes": other suggested
alternative routes while destination
guidance is active
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
145
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
5. Select additional route criteria, if desired.
Where possible, the selected criteria will be
avoided on the route.
> Avoid highways where possible:
"Avoid highways"
> Avoid toll roads where possible:
"Avoid toll roads"
> Avoid ferries where possible:
"Avoid ferries"
The setting applies to the current route and to
the planning of future routes.
Dynamic destination guidance
"Dynamic guidance" is switched on:
The route is automatically changed in the event
of traffic obstructions. The system does not
point out traffic obstructions along the original
route.
Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic obstruction, the route
can also be calculated so that you travel
through the traffic obstruction.
Activating Dynamic destination
guidance
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Dynamic guidance"
If the "Avoid highways", "Avoid toll roads"
or "Avoid ferries" route criteria are
selected, route calculation may take consider-
ably longer.<
Route
General information
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle,
various views of the route are available during
destination guidance.
> List of streets and towns/cities
> Map view, refer to page 146
Displaying a list of the streets or towns/
cities on the route
When destination guidance is started, a list of
the streets and towns/cities on the route is dis-
played. The driving distances and traffic bulle-
tins are displayed for each route section.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. Highlight a section.
The section is displayed in the preview map.
Bypassing a section of the route
During destination guidance, you can revise the
navigation system's route recommendations to
avoid particular stretches of road. Enter the
number of miles/kilometers that you want to
travel before returning to the original route.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "New route for:"
4. Turn the controller: enter the desired num-
ber of miles.
5. Press the controller.
Resuming the original route
If the route section should no longer be
bypassed:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Remove blocking"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination guidance
146
Gas station recommendations
The remaining range is calculated and gas sta-
tions along the route are recommended.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Route information"
3. "Recommended refuel"
A list of gas stations is displayed.
4. Select a gas station.
5. Select the symbol.
6. "Start guidance" or "Add as another dest.".
Destination guidance
through voice instructions
Switching voice instructions on/off
Voice instructions can be switched on or off
during destination guidance.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Select the symbol.
For rapid access, the feature can be stored on a
programmable memory key, refer to page 20.
Repeating a voice instruction
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Highlight the symbol.
4. Press the controller twice.
Adjusting the volume of voice
instructions*
The volume can be adjusted only while a voice
instruction is being issued.
1. Have the last voice instruction repeated,
if necessary.
2. Turn the button during the voice instruction
to select the desired volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Map view
Displaying the map view
You can have your current position displayed on
a map. After starting the destination guidance,
the planned route is shown on the map.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
The following functions are directly available in
the map view:
Symbol Meaning
Voice instructions are
switched on
Voice instructions are
switched off
Symbol Function
Starting/stopping destina-
tion guidance
Switching voice instructions
on/off
Changing route criteria or
selecting route alternatives
Special destinations
Displaying traffic bulletins
Interactive map
Map view settings
Changing scale
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
147
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Information in the map view
> Time, entertainment source, sound output,
map orientation
> Distance from destination/intermediate
destination, estimated time of arrival, if des-
tination guidance is active.
> Any traffic obstructions are highlighted in
color.
To show/hide information on the map:
Press the controller.
Viewing the map
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select a setting:
> "View facing north"
> "View in dir. of travel"
> "Perspective view"
> "Arrow display"
3. Press the controller.
Changing the map section
Select "Interactive map".
> To shift the map: move the controller in the
required direction.
> To shift the map diagonally: move the con-
troller in the required direction and turn it.
Changing scale
1. Select the symbol.
2. Turn the controller to adjust the scale.
Automatic scaling of the map
In the map view facing north, turn the controller
in any direction until AUTO is displayed as the
map scale.
The map shows the entire range from your loca-
tion to the destination.
Settings for the map view
The map is shown on the Control Display.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Settings"
3. Set the optimized map view.
> "Day/night mode"
Select and create the necessary settings
depending on the light conditions. If the
"Traffic conditions/gray map" is acti-
vated, this setting is not taken into
account.
> "Satellite images"
Depending on the availability and resolu-
tion, satellite images
* are displayed in
scales of approx. 1 mile to 600 miles/
2 km to 1,000 km .
> "Perspective view in 3D"
Displays a spatial view. Prominent areas
that are contained in the navigation data
are displayed on the map in 3D.
> "Traffic conditions/gray map"
The map is optimized for displaying traf-
fic bulletins. Symbols for the special
destinations are no longer displayed.
Map view for the split screen display
The map view for the split screen can be
selected separately from the main screen.
1. Open "Options".
2. "Split screen"
The split screen is switched on.
3. Move the controller to the right repeatedly
until the split screen content is selected.
4. Select the map view:
> "Arrow display"
> "Map facing north"
> "Map direction of travel"
> "Map view with perspective"
> "Exit ramp view"
Changing scale
1. Move the controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
2. turn the controller.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination guidance
148
Traffic bulletins*
You can display the traffic bulletins from radio
stations that broadcast the TMC (Traffic Mes-
sage Channel) of a traffic information service.
This information from the traffic information
service is continuously updated on the basis of
measurement data from traffic control centers
and information on traffic congestion.
During destination guidance, traffic bulletins
that are relevant to areas along the route are
automatically displayed and taken into account
in the route planning. You can open all traffic
bulletins manually via iDrive.
The traffic bulletins are shown in the map view.
Real Time Traffic Information End-User
Provisions
Certain BMW models equipped with navigation
have the capability to display real-time traffic
information. If your system has this capability
the following additional terms and conditions
apply:
An End-User shall no longer have the right to
use the Traffic Data in the event that the End-
User is in material breach of the terms and con-
ditions contained herein.
A. Total Traffic Network, a division of Clear
Channel Broadcasting, Inc. ("Total Traffic Net-
work") holds the rights to the traffic incident
data and RDS-TMC network through which it is
delivered. You may not modify, copy, scan or
use any other method to reproduce, duplicate,
republish, transmit or distribute in any way any
portion of traffic incident data. You agree to
indemnify, defend and hold harmless BMW of
North America, LLC. ("BMW NA") and Total
Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc (and their affiliates)
against any and all claims, damages, costs or
other expenses that arise directly or indirectly
out of (a) your unauthorized use of the traffic
incident data or the RDS-TMC network, (b) your
violation of this directive and/or (c) any unautho-
rized or unlawful activities by you in connection
herewith.
B. Total Traffic Network traffic data is informa-
tional only. User assumes all risk of use. Total
Traffic Network, BMW NA, and their suppliers
make no representations about content, traffic
and road conditions, route usability, or speed.
C. The licensed material is provided to license
"as is," and "where is". Total Traffic Network,
including, but not limited to, any and all third
party providers of any of the licensed material,
expressly disclaims, to the fullest extent permit-
ted by law, all warranties or representations
with respect to the licensed material (including,
without limitation, that the licensed material will
be error-free, will operate without interruption
or that the traffic data will be accurate), express,
implied or statutory, including, without limita-
tion, the implied warranties of merchantability,
non-infringement fitness for a particular pur-
pose, or those arising from a course of dealing
or usage of trade.
D. Neither Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc. nor
BMW NA will be liable to you for any indirect,
special, consequential, exemplary, or incidental
damages (including, without limitation, lost rev-
enues, anticipated revenues, or profits relating
to the same) arising from any claim relating
directly or indirectly to use of the traffic data,
and even if Total Traffic Network, Inrix, Inc., or
BMW NA are aware of the possibility of such
damages. These limitations apply to all claims,
including, without limitation, claims in contract
and tort (such as negligence, product liability
and strict liability). Some states do not allow the
exclusion or limitation of incidental or conse-
quential damages, so those particular limita-
tions may not apply to you.
Activating/deactivating reception
1. "Navigation"
2. Open "Options".
3. Activate/deactivate "Receive Traffic Info".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
149
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
Traffic bulletins in a list
A list of the traffic bulletins can be opened via
the menu or map view.
Opening traffic bulletins
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Move the controller to the left, if necessary.
4. Select the symbol: "Traffic Info"
First, the traffic bulletins on the planned
route are displayed. The traffic bulletins are
sorted in the order of their distance from the
current vehicle position.
5. Select a traffic bulletin.
Additional information can be displayed for
some traffic bulletins:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Additional information is displayed.
3. To exit from the menu:
Move the controller to the left.
Traffic bulletins in the map
When the traffic bulletin map is activated, the
Control Display changes to a grayscale display.
This enables a better view of the traffic bulle-
tins. The day/night mode is disregarded in this
setting. The symbols for the special destina-
tions are no longer displayed.
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Settings"
5. "Traffic conditions/gray map"
Symbols in the map view
Depending on the scale of the map and the
location of the traffic obstruction along the
route, the symbols for the traffic obstructions
are displayed.
Additional information in the map view
Depending on the map scale, a traffic obstruc-
tion's length, direction and impact are displayed
on the map using triangles or gray bars along
the calculated route. The colors displayed
depend on the information transmitted by the
traffic information service.
> Red: traffic jam
> Orange: stop-and-go traffic
> Yellow: heavy traffic
> Green: traffic flowing freely
> Gray: general traffic information, e.g. con-
struction zone
Filtering of traffic bulletins
You can filter which traffic bulletins are to be
displayed by the system:
1. "Navigation"
2. "Map"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Traffic Info categories"
5. Select the desired categories.
Traffic bulletins of the selected categories are
displayed.
> Traffic bulletins on incidents along the route
are always displayed.
> For your own safety, traffic bulletins that
notify you of potentially dangerous situa-
tions, such as wrong-way drivers, cannot be
hidden.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Destination guidance
150
Traffic bulletins during destination
guidance
System response will vary depending on
whether or not "Dynamic guidance" is selected,
refer to page 145.
During destination guidance, traffic obstruc-
tions on the route are taken into consideration.
Information on sources of great danger, such as
wrong-way drivers, is displayed regardless of
the setting.
Displaying traffic obstructions
When the navigation system receives a traffic
obstruction message and "Dynamic guidance"
is not selected, you will be shown certain infor-
mation, such as the length of the traffic jam,
when you are approx. 30 miles/50 km away
from the traffic obstruction.
The last possible detour exit is indicated just
before you reach it.
This information is displayed even if you have
called up another application on the Control
Display.
Selecting a detour
Select the symbol: "Detour".
"Dynamic guidance" is activated for the current
destination guidance.
Dynamic route planning
When "Dynamic guidance" is selected, the
route will be changed automatically in the event
of a traffic obstruction. The system will not point
out traffic obstructions on the original route.
Depending on the road type and the kind and
extent of the traffic obstruction, the newly cal-
culated route may lead through the traffic
obstruction.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Navigation Driving tips
151
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunications EntertainmentMobility
What to do if …
What to do if …
> The current position cannot be displayed?
The position is in an unrecognized region, in
a poor reception area, or the system is in the
process of determining the position.
Reception is generally available when you
are in the open.
> The destination guidance does not accept
an address without the street name?
A downtown area cannot be determined for
the town or city that has been entered. Input
any street in the selected town/city and
start destination guidance.
> The destination guidance does not accept a
destination?
The destination data is not contained in the
navigation data. Choose a destination as
close as possible to the original one.
> The letters for a destination cannot be
selected during destination entry?
The stored data do not contain the data of
the destination. Select a destination that is
as close as possible to the original.
> The map view is displayed in grayscale?
When the traffic bulletin map is activated,
the Control Display changes to a grayscale
display. This enables a better view of the
traffic bulletins.
> Voice instructions are no longer issued
before intersections during destination
guidance?
The area has not been fully recorded yet, or
you have left the recommended route and
the system requires a few seconds to calcu-
late a new route suggestion.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Entertainment
Operation of the radio, CD equipment and
external audio devices as well as their tone
settings are described in this chapter.
Entertainment
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
On/off and tone
154
On/off and tone
The following audio and video sources share
the same control elements and adjustments:
> Radio
> CD/DVD player
> CD changer
*
> Video*
> External devices, e.g. MP3 player
Controls
The audio and video sources can be controlled
using the:
> Buttons near the CD/DVD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
> Voice activation system
Buttons in the area of the CD/DVD
player
1 Sound output for entertainment on/off, vol-
ume
> Press: switch on/off
When you switch on the unit, the last set
radio station or track is played.
> Turn: adjusting the volume
2 Eject the CD/DVD
3 CD/DVD drive
*
4FM/AM: change the radio station wave-
band
5MODE: change the audio and video
sources
6 Station scan/track search
> Change the radio station
> Select the track for the CD/DVD player,
CD changer and certain multimedia
devices
Switching on/off
To switch the entertainment audio output on or
off:
Press button 1 next to the CD/DVD player.
This symbol on the Control Display indicates
that sound output is switched off.
The sound output is available for approx.
20 minutes after the ignition was switched off.
For sound output, switch the unit back on.
Adjusting volume
Turn button 1 next to the CD/DVD player until
the desired volume is obtained.
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, refer to page 10.
Tone control
You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
and bass or the speed-dependent volume
increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
sources.
The settings are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Treble, bass, balance, fader
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
155
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. Select the desired tone setting.
4. To adjust: turn the controller.
5. To store: press the controller.
Equalizer*
You can set individual sound frequency ranges.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Equalizer"
4. Select the desired setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Multi-channel playback, surround*
You can choose between stereo and multi-
channel playback, surround.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "L7 Surround"
Multi-channel playback, surround, is simulated
when playing back an audio track in stereo.
Surround is automatically activated or deacti-
vated, depending on the audio track selected.
LOGIC7 and the LOGIC7 logo are registered
trade marks of Lexicon, Inc., a company of the
Harman International Group.
Volume
> "Speed volume": adjustment of volume
depending on driving speed
> "PDC"
*: volume of the PDC signal tone rel-
ative to the entertainment sound output
> "Gong": volume of the signal tone, e.g. for
the "Fasten safety belts" reminder, relative
to the entertainment sound output
Adjustments
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Volume settings"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
On/off and tone
156
4. Select the desired volume setting.
5. To adjust: turn the controller.
6. To store: press the controller.
Resetting tone settings
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
1. "CD/Multimedia", "Radio" or "Settings".
2. "Tone"
3. "Reset"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
157
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Radio
Your radio is designed for reception of the fol-
lowing stations:
> FM and AM
> HD Radio
*
> Satellite radio*
Selecting a station
Press the button if the sound output is switched
off.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Select the desired station.
The selected station is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Changing stations
Turn the controller and press it
or
press the button for the corresponding
direction
or
press the buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10.
Selecting a station manually
Station selection using the frequency.
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. "Manual"
4. Select the frequency: turn the controller.
To store the station: press the controller for an
extended period.
Storing stations
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Radio
158
3. Select the desired station.
4. Press the controller for an extended period.
5. Select the desired memory location.
The stations are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
Via programmable memory keys
You can store a station on the programmable
memory keys, refer to page 20.
1. Select a station.
2. ... Press the desired button
for a longer period.
Radio Data System RDS*
In the FM waveband, additional information is
transmitted via RDS. If the reception conditions
are good, the station names are shown on the
Control Display. Where reception is poor or in
the event of interference, it may take some time
before the station names appear in the display.
Switching the RDS on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "RDS"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
HD Radio™ reception*
Many stations broadcast both analog and digi-
tal signals. If a digital radio network is available,
these stations can be received digitally and thus
with better sound quality.
License conditions
HD Radio™ technology is manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corp. U.S. and For-
eign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD and HD
Radio logos are proprietary trademarks of iBiq-
uity Digital Corp.
Switching digital radio reception on/off
1. "Radio"
2. "FM" or "AM"
3. Open "Options".
4. "HD Radio Reception"
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
This symbol is displayed when a station is
received digitally.
In areas in which the station is not continuously
received in digital mode, playback switches
between analog and digital reception. Any time
shift between these two broadcasts can lead to
repetitions or interruptions in the output. In this
case, switch off digital radio reception.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
159
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Displaying additional information
Some stations broadcast additional information
on the current track, such as the name of the
artist.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Station info"
Selecting a substation
This symbol indicates that a main station
includes additional subchannels. The station
name of the main station ends with HD1. The
station names of the subchannels end with
HD2, HD3, etc.
1. Select the desired station.
2. Press the controller.
3. Select the substation.
In the event of poor reception, the substation is
muted for several seconds. If reception is inter-
rupted for a longer period of time, then the sys-
tem switches back to the main station.
Presets
It is possible to store up to 40 stations.
Calling up a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
Storing a station
The station currently selected is stored.
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. "Store station"
4. Select the desired memory location.
The list of stored stations is stored for the
remote control currently in use.
You can also store the stations on the program-
mable memory keys, refer to page 20.
Deleting a station
1. "Radio"
2. "Presets"
3. Select the desired station.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Satellite radio
160
Satellite radio
General information
The channels are offered in predefined pack-
ages. The packages must be enabled by tele-
phone.
Navigation bar overview
The functions of the navigation bar symbols can
also be stored on the programmable memory
buttons, refer to page 20.
Managing a subscription
To be able to enable or unsubscribe from the
channels, you must have reception. It is usually
at its best when you have an unobstructed view
of the sky. The channel name is displayed in the
status line.
Enabling the channels
The Unsubscribed Channels category contains
all disabled channels.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the Unsubscribed Channels cate-
gory.
5. Select the desired channel.
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
6. Select the phone number to have the chan-
nel enabled.
You can also unsubscribe from the channels via
this phone number.
Unsubscribing from channels
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
*
Symbol Function
Changing the list view
Selecting a category
Direct channel entry
Timeshift
Opening the favorites, opening
the My Favorites category
Managing the favorites
Traffic Jump
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
161
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. "Manage subscription"
The phone number and an electronic serial
number, ESN, are displayed.
5. Call Sirius to unsubscribe from the chan-
nels.
Selecting a channel
You can only listen to enabled channels.
The selected channel is stored for the remote
control currently in use.
Via iDrive
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Select "All channels" or the desired cate-
gory.
4. Select the desired channel.
Via the button in the area of the CD/
DVD player
Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next channel is selected.
Via direct channel entry
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Select channel"
4. Turn the controller until the desired channel
is reached and press the controller.
Storing a channel
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, open "All channels" or the
desired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
6. Press the controller again to confirm the
highlighted channel.
7. Select the desired memory location.
The channels are stored for the remote control
currently in use.
You can also store the channels on the pro-
grammable memory keys, refer to page 20.
Changing the list view
The list view changes every time the first sym-
bol on the navigation bar is pressed.
Information on the channel is displayed.
Symbol Function
Channel name
Artist
Track
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Satellite radio
162
Selecting a category
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Category"
4. Select the desired category.
Timeshift
Approx. one hour of the program being broad-
cast on the channel currently being listened to
is stored in a buffer. Prerequisite: the signal
must be available.
The stored audio track can be played with a
delay following the live broadcast. When the
buffer is full, the older tracks are overwritten.
The buffer is cleared when a new channel is
selected.
Opening the timeshift function
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
> The red arrow shows the current playback
position.
> The time difference to the live broadcast is
displayed next to the buffer bar.
> With a live broadcast: "live".
Timeshift menu
Automatic Timeshift
With the function activated, the audio playback
is automatically stopped when:
> there are incoming and outgoing phone
calls.
> the voice activation system is activated.
> muting function is activated.
The audio playback continues after a time
delay.
Activating
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Replay - Time shift"
4. "Automatic time shift"
Deactivating
"Automatic time shift"
Storing favorites
Up to 30 favorites can be stored in the favorites
list. Available favorites are artist, track, game,
league and team.
Storing the artist, track or game
It is only possible to store favorites that are cur-
rently being broadcast. The channel informa-
tion must be available.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. If necessary, select "All channels" or the
desired category.
4. Select the desired channel.
5. Press the controller again.
Symbol Function
Go to the live broadcast
Playback/pause
Next track
Previous track
Fast forward
Reverse
Automatic Timeshift deactivated/
activated
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
163
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
6. Select the artist, track or game.
Storing the league or team
Leagues or teams can be added to the favorites
from a selection list.
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Manage favorites"
4. "Add sports information"
5. Select the desired league.
6. Select "Add all teams" or the desired team.
Opening the favorites
When an activated favorite is playing, the fol-
lowing message appears for approx.
20 seconds: "Favorite alert!".
Select "Favorites" while the message is
being displayed.
The displayed favorite is played.
If there is no message, the system changes to
the My Favorites category. All favorites cur-
rently being broadcast can be selected from a
list.
Managing the favorites
Activating/deactivating the favorites
Favorites can be activated and deactivated glo-
bally and individually.
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Select "Activate alert" or the desired favor-
ite.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Deleting favorites
1. "Satellite radio"
2. "Manage favorites"
3. Highlight the desired favorite.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete entry"
Traffic Jump
Traffic and weather information for a selected
region is broadcast every few minutes.
Selecting a region
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Set jump"
5. Select the desired region.
The region is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Activating/deactivating the jump
1. "Radio"
2. "Satellite radio"
3. "Jump to:"
Information for the selected region is broadcast
as soon as it is available.
A new panel opens.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Satellite radio
164
Canceling the Traffic Jump: "Cancel".
Select one of the symbols to deactivate Traffic
Jump.
Automatic update
About twice a year, Sirius performs an update of
the channel names and positions. The update
takes place automatically and may take several
minutes.
Notes
> Reception may not be available in some sit-
uations, such as under certain environmen-
tal or topographic conditions. The satellite
radio cannot influence this.
> The signal may not be available in tunnels or
underground garages, next to tall buildings
or near trees, mountains or other powerful
sources of radio interference.
Symbol Meaning
Information will be broadcast
shortly.
Information is currently being
broadcast.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
165
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CD/DVD player and CD changer
CD/DVD playback
Inserting a CD/DVD
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
labeled side facing up. The CD/DVD is drawn in
automatically.
Playback starts automatically if the sound out-
put is on. For CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, it can take several minutes to read in
the data, depending on the directory structure.
Playable formats
CD/DVD player
> DVD: DVD-ROM, DVD-R, DVD+R, DVD-
RW, DVD+RW, DVD-R DL, DVD+R DL, DVD
audio (video part only), DVD video
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA,
VCD, SVCD
> Compressed audio files: MP3, WMA, AAC
CD changer
*
> CD: CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW, CD-DA
Starting playback
Via iDrive
Fill the CD/DVD magazine and insert it, refer to
page 169.
To start playback if a CD is already located in
the player or changer:
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD:
Eject the CD/DVD
Press the button next to the CD/DVD player.
The CD/DVD emerges slightly from the drive.
Audio playback
Selecting a track using the button
Press the button for the appropriate
direction as often as necessary until the desired
track is reached.
*
Symbol Function
CD/DVD player
CD changer
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
166
Selecting a track using iDrive
Audio CDs
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the desired track to begin playback.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio
files*
Depending on the data, some letters and num-
bers of the CD/DVD may not be displayed cor-
rectly.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Select the directory, if necessary.
To change to a higher level directory: move
the controller to the left.
5. Select a track and press the controller.
Displaying information about the
track*
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks on the CD/DVD
> Track file name
Random play sequence
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are played
once in random sequence.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the desired CD or DVD.
4. Open "Options".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
167
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
5. "Random"
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files: the
directories and the tracks contained therein are
played back in random sequence.
Random mode is switched off when the audio
source is changed or the ignition is switched off.
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Automatic repeat*
Selected tracks, directories or CDs/DVDs are
repeated automatically.
Video playback*
Country codes
Only DVDs with the code of the home region
can be played back; also refer to the information
on your DVD.
Starting playback
For your own safety, the video image is only dis-
played up to approx. 2 mph/3 km/h, and in some
market-specific versions, only with the parking
brake engaged or the selector lever in position
P.
DVD video
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a DVD with video content.
4. "DVD menu"
5. Start the DVD via the DVD menu.
VCD/SVCD
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select a CD/DVD with video content.
4. "Select track"
5. Select the desired track.
The CD/DVD is started.
Video menu
To open the Video menu:
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Press the controller when "Back" is dis-
played.
The Video menu is displayed:
Code Region
1USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East, South
Africa
3 Southeast Asia
4 Australia, Central and South Amer-
ica, New Zealand
5 Northwest Asia, North Africa
6China
0 All regions
Symbol Function
Open the DVD menu
*
Starting playback
Pause
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
168
In fast forward/reverse: the speed increases
every time the controller is pressed. To stop,
start playback.
DVD menu
1. If necessary, turn the controller to open the
Video menu.
2. "DVD menu"
The DVD menu is displayed. The display
depends on the contents of the DVD.
> To select menu items: move and press the
controller.
> To change to the Video menu: turn the con-
troller and select "Back".
DVD/VCD settings
For some DVDs, settings can only be made via
the DVD menu; refer also to the information on
your DVD.
Language*
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Audio/language"
4. Select the desired language.
The languages that are available depend on the
DVD.
Subtitles*
Subtitles can be selected if they are contained
on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Subtitles"
4. Select the desired language or "Do not dis-
play subtitles".
Brightness, contrast, color
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Display settings"
4. "Brightness", "Contrast" or "Color"
5. Turn the controller until the desired setting
is displayed, and then press the controller.
Zoom
Display the video image on the full screen.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
Stop
Next chapter/next track
Previous chapter/previous
track
Fast forward
Reverse
Symbol Function
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
169
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
4. "Zoom mode"
Selecting track
DVD video:
1. turn the controller when the DVD menu is
displayed.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Select title"
5. Select the desired track.
VCD/SVCD:
1. "Select track"
2. Select the desired track.
Camera angle*
The camera angle depends on the DVD.
1. Turn the controller during playback.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Additional options"
4. "Viewing angle"
5. Select the desired camera angle.
Opening the main menu, back
These functions are not contained on every
DVD. Therefore, they may not be available for
use.
CD changer*
The BMW CD changer for six CDs is behind the
left side panel in the cargo area.
Coupe
Convertible
Removing the CD magazine
To insert or remove CDs from the CD magazine,
you must first remove it from the CD changer:
1. Push the cover to one side, arrow 1.
2. Press the button, arrow 2.
The CD magazine will be ejected.
Push the magazine back in after at least
2seconds have passed so that the inserted
CDs can be read in again.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
CD/DVD player and CD changer
170
Inserting/removing CDs from the CD
magazine
When loading CDs into or removing them from
the CD magazine, hold them at their edges and
do not touch the reflective signal-sensing area.
Inserting CDs:
Insert one CD per compartment with the
labeled side up.
Removing CDs:
Pull out the desired compartment and take out
the CD.
Inserting the CD magazine
Insert the CD magazine all the way in the direc-
tion of arrow 1 and close the cover, arrow 2.
The CD changer automatically reads in the
loaded CDs and is then ready for operation.
Notes
BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
ucts. Do not operate if the cover is damaged;
otherwise, severe eye damage can result.
Do not use self-recorded CDs/DVDs with labels
applied as these can become detached during
playback due to heat build-up and can cause
irreparable damage to the device.
Only use round CDs/DVDs with a standard
diameter of 4.7 in/12 cm and do not play CDs/
DVDs with an adapter, e.g. CD singles; other-
wise, the CDs or the adapter might jam and no
longer eject.
Do not use a combined CD/DVD, e.g. DVD
Plus
;
otherwise, the CD/DVD can jam and will no
longer eject.<
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD changers and players have been
optimized for performance in vehicles. In some
instances they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted correctly.
Humidity
High levels of humidity can lead to condensa-
tion on the CD/DVD or the laser's scan lens and
temporarily prevent playback.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs
If malfunctions occur only with particular CDs/
DVDs, this may be due to one of the following
reasons.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Possible reasons for malfunctions with self-
recorded CDs/DVDs are, for example, inconsis-
tent data-creation or recording processes, or
poor quality or old age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only label CDs/DVDs on the top, with a pen
designed for this purpose.
Damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints, as well as dust,
scratches or moisture on the CDs/DVDs.
Keep CDs/DVDs in protective sleeves or cases.
Do not subject CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 1227/506, nor to high humidity levels
or direct sunlight.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
171
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
CDs/DVDs with copy protection
CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This can mean that some CDs/
DVDs cannot be played or can only be played to
a limited extent.
MACROVISION
This product contains copyrighted technology
that is based on multiple registered U.S. pat-
ents and the intellectual property of the Macro-
vision Corporation and other manufacturers.
The use of this copy protection must be
approved by Macrovision. Unless otherwise
agreed with Macrovision, media with this pro-
tection may only be used for private purposes.
Copying of this technology is prohibited.
DTS Digital Surround™
Manufactured under license of US
patent numbers: 5,451,942;
5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762; 6,487,535 &
other patents granted and pending in both the
USA and worldwide. DTS and the logo are reg-
istered trademarks & DTS Digital Surround and
the DTS logos are trademarks of DTS Inc. ©
DTS, Inc. All rights reserved.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Music collection
172
Music collection
Storing music
The music tracks from CDs, DVDs and USB
devices can be stored in the music collection in
the vehicle and played from there.
> Audio CD: tracks are converted into a com-
pressed audio format when they are stored.
If available, information on the album, such
as the artist, is stored as well.
> CD/DVD or USB device with compressed
audio files: the entire content of the CD/
DVD or the USB device is stored in the vehi-
cle as an album. After storing, the tracks and
directories can be deleted individually. Files
are only stored in the WMA, MP3, and AAC
formats.
Tracks with DRM copy protection can be
stored in the vehicle but cannot be played
back.
Regularly back up the music data; other-
wise, it could be lost if there is a fault on
the hard drive.<
Music recognition technology and
related data are provided by
Gracenote®. Gracenote® is the industry stan-
dard in music recognition technology and
related content delivery. For more information,
please visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright © 2000-2009 Gracenote.
Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000-2009
Gracenote. This product and service may prac-
tice one or more of the following U.S. Patents:
#5,987,525; #6,061,680; #6,154,773;
#6,161,132; #6,230,192; #6,230,207;
#6,240,459; #6,330,593; and other patents
issued or pending. Some services supplied
under license from Open Globe, Inc. for U.S.
Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trade-
marks of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and
logotype, and the "Powered by Gracenote"
logo are trademarks of Gracenote.
Storing files from CDs/DVDs
CDs/DVDs can only be stored from the CD/
DVD player.
1. Insert a CD/DVD into the CD/DVD player.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "CD/DVD"
4. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
5. "Store in vehicle"
The music collection is displayed.
The tracks are stored and played back in
sequence from the music collection.
Observe the following during the storage pro-
cess:
Do not switch back to the CD/DVD player and
do not remove the CD/DVD from the CD/DVD
player; otherwise, the storage process will be
interrupted.
You can switch to the other audio sources with-
out interrupting the storage process. Tracks
from the current CD/DVD can also be called up,
if they have been stored already.
Interrupting storage
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
173
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
3. "Storing..."
4. "Cancel storing"
The storage process is interrupted and can be
continued at any time.
Continuing the storage process
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "CD/DVD"
3. Select the symbol for the CD/DVD
player.
4. "Continue storing"
Storage of the CD continues at the beginning of
the track at which storage was interrupted.
Album information
During storage, information such as the name
of the artist is stored with the track, if this infor-
mation is available in the vehicle database or on
the CD.
To update the database, contact your service
center.
Storing from a USB device
To store music, a suitable device must be con-
nected to the USB interface in the glove com-
partment.
> Suitable devices: USB mass storage
devices, such as USB flash drives or MP3
players with a USB interface.
> Unsuitable devices: USB hard drive, USB
hubs, USB memory card readers with multi-
ple inserts, Apple iPod/iPhone.
Music from a USB device can be stored
only via the USB interface in the glove
compartment.<
1. Connect the USB device to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment.
2. "CD/Multimedia"
3. "Music collection"
4. Open "Options".
5. "Music data import/export"
6. "Import music (USB)"
Playing music
Music search
All tracks for which additional information has
been stored can be accessed by the music
search. Tracks without additional information
can be called up via the corresponding album.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Music search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Music collection
174
4. Select the desired category.
5. To select the desired entry:
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry.
or
> Select the desired entry from the list.
6. Select additional categories if desired.
The tracks found are listed in alphabetical
order.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, to search for all tracks by a certain
artist, call up that artist only. All of the tracks
by that artist are then displayed.
7. "Start play"
Restarting the music search
"New search"
Music search by voice*
For instructions on the voice activation system,
refer to page 22.
1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
To select a track directly:
Say the voice command and the name of the
desired track in one sentence.
Current playback
The list of tracks that was generated last by the
music search or the album selected last.
1. "Current playback"
2. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Top 50
List of the 50 most frequently played tracks.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. "Top 50"
4. Select the desired track, if necessary.
Albums
All stored albums, listed in order of their storage
dates. Symbols indicate the format.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Select the desired album.
2. {Music search}
3. Open the desired category, e.g. {Select
artist}.
4. Say the desired entry in the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
{Title …}
Symbol Format
Audio CD
Compressed audio files
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
175
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Depending on the album, the tracks or the
subdirectories of the album are displayed.
The first track is played automatically, if
possible.
4. To select tracks, change directories if
needed. To go up one level in the directory,
move the controller to the left.
Random play sequence
All tracks of the selection are played back in
random order.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Managing music
Albums
Renaming an album
The name of the album, if available, is automat-
ically entered when the album is stored. If the
name is unknown, it can be changed later.
An album cannot be renamed while a track from
that album is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Rename album"
6. Select the letters individually.
Deleting an album
An album cannot be deleted while a track from
it is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the desired album.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete album"
Deleting a track or directory
A track cannot be deleted while it is being
played.
A directory cannot be deleted while a track from
it is being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Highlight the directory or track.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Delete folder" or "Delete track".
Free memory capacity
Display the free memory capacity in the
music collection.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Free memory"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Music collection
176
Music collection
Backing up the music collection
The entire music collection can be stored on a
USB medium. Make sure there is enough free
memory capacity on the USB device.
Depending on the number of tracks, backing up
the music collection may take several hours.
Therefore, it is best to perform the backup dur-
ing a long trip.
1. Start the engine.
2. Connect the USB medium to the USB inter-
face in the glove compartment, refer to
page 115.
3. "CD/Multimedia"
4. "Music collection"
5. Open "Options".
6. "Music data import/export"
7. "Backup music on USB"
Restoring the music collection in
the vehicle
When storing from the USB device, the
music collection existing in the vehicle is
replaced.<
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Music data import/export"
5. "Restore music from USB"
Deleting the music collection
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "Music collection"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete music collection"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
177
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
External devices
At a glance
AUX-IN port
You can connect an external audio device, for
instance an MP3 player, and play audio tracks
over the car's loudspeaker system. You can
adjust the tone using iDrive.
Connecting
Lift up the center armrest.
Connection for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-IN port.
Starting audio playback
Connect the audio device, switch it on and
select a track. Operate the system on the audio
device.
Via iDrive
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
Adjusting the volume
The volume of the sound output depends on
the audio device. If this volume differs markedly
from the volume of the other audio sources, it is
advisable to adjust the volumes.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. If applicable, "External devices"
3. "AUX front"
4. "Volume"
5. Turn the controller until the desired volume
is set and then press the controller.
Symbol Meaning
AUX-IN port
USB audio interface
*/audio inter-
face mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
External devices
178
USB audio interface*/
extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile
phone*
It is possible to connect external audio devices/
mobile phones. They can be operated via iDrive.
Sound is output on the vehicle loudspeakers.
Options for connecting external
devices
> Connection via USB audio interface: Apple
iPod/iPhone, USB devices, e.g. MP3
player, USB flash drive, or mobile phones
that are supported by the USB audio inter-
face.
> Connection via snap-in adapter
*, refer to
page 184, when equipped with additional
connection of music player in the mobile
phone: Apple iPhone/mobile phones. Play-
back is possible only if no audio device/
mobile phone is connected to the USB
audio interface.
Due to the large number of different audio
devices/mobile phones available on the market,
it cannot be ensured that every audio device/
mobile phone is operable on the vehicle.
Ask about suitable audio devices/mobile
phones at your BMW center.
Audio files
The system can play standard audio formats,
e.g. MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM), and AAC, as well
as playlists in the M3U format.
Connecting via USB audio interface
Lift up the center armrest.
1 AUX-IN port for audio playback:
TRS connector 1/8 in/3.5 mm
2 USB interface
Apple iPod/iPhone
To connect the device, use the special cable
adapter for the Apple iPod/iPhone, available
from your BMW center. The cable adapter is
required for a flawless connection.
Using the Apple iPod/iPhone cable adapter,
connect the Apple iPod/iPhone to the AUX-IN
port 1 and USB interface 2.
The Apple iPod/iPhone menu structure is sup-
ported by the USB audio interface.
USB device
When connecting the device use a flexi-
ble adapter cable, to protect the USB
interface and your USB device against physical
damage.<
Connect the USB device to connector 2, using
a flexible adapter cable.
After the device is connected for the first time,
the information on all tracks (e.g. artist, type of
music) and the playlists are transferred from the
USB device to the vehicle. This procedure may
take some time. The duration depends on the
USB device and the number of tracks.
During transmission, the tracks can be called up
via the file directory.
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the vehicle, or a total of about 16,000
tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected or if more than
16,000 tracks are stored, information on exist-
ing tracks may be deleted.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
played.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
NavigationEntertainment Driving tips
179
Reference At a glanceControlsCommunicationsMobility
Starting audio playback
If the audio device has a device name, the name
is displayed.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
Playback begins with the first track. When an
Apple iPhone is connected via the snap-in
adapter and an audio device is connected to the
AUX-IN port at the same time, the audio signal
of the AUX-IN port is played.
Information about the track
If information about a track has been stored, it is
displayed automatically:
> Artist
> Album title
> Number of tracks
> Track file name
Track search
Selection is possible via:
> Playback lists
> Information: type of music, artist, album,
title
> Additionally for USB devices: file directory,
composer
Track titles are displayed if they have been
stored in the Latin alphabet.
Starting the track search
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
The name of the audio device may appear.
4. Select the desired category, "Genre",
"Artist".
All entries are displayed in a list. The "A-Z
search" can be used to find specific entries.
> Open "A-Z search" and enter the
desired entry. When a character is
entered, a filter is applied using this
character as the first letter. When several
characters are entered, all results are
displayed that contain this sequence of
characters.
> Select the desired entry from the list.
5. Select additional categories if desired.
Not all categories need to be selected. For
example, if you wish to display all of the
tracks of a particular artist, then only select
this artist. All of the tracks by that artist are
then displayed.
6. "Start play"
Restarting a track search
"New search"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
External devices
180
Playback lists
To open playback lists.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Playlists"
Current playback
List of tracks currently being played.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Select the symbol.
4. "Current playback"
Random play sequence
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks of a single artist.
1. "CD/Multimedia"
2. "External devices"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Random"
Fast forward/reverse
Press and hold the button for the corre-
sponding direction.
Notes
Do not expose the audio device to
extreme environmental conditions, e.g.
very high temperatures, refer to the operating
instructions of the audio device. Otherwise, the
audio device may become damaged, which
could compromise safety while driving.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bit rates greater than 256 KBit/s, the
files may not play back correctly in every case.
Notes on connecting
> The connected audio device is supplied
with a maximum current of 500 mA, if the
device supports this. Therefore, do not
connect the device to the power socket in
the vehicle.
> Do not forcibly connect the plug to the
USB interface.
> Do not connect devices such as fans or
lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect USB hard drives.
> Do not use the USB audio interface to
charge external devices.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Communications
This chapter describes how to use the
telephone, BMW Assist and TeleService.
Communications
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
184
Telephone
The concept
Your BMW is equipped with a full preparation
package mobile phone. After pairing a suitable
mobile phone with the vehicle once, you can
operate the mobile phone via the iDrive, the
buttons on the steering wheel or using voice
commands
*.
Once a mobile phone has been paired with your
vehicle, it is automatically recognized as soon
as it is inside the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or the ignition is switched on. You can
store the pairing data for up to four mobile
phones simultaneously. If several mobile
phones are detected at the same time, the
mobile phone last paired can be operated via
the vehicle.
Using the telephone inside
the vehicle
Using the snap-in adapter*
The so-called snap-in adapter, a holder for
mobile phones, allows you to charge the mobile
phone's battery and connect the mobile phone
to your vehicle's outside antenna. This ensures
better network reception and consistent repro-
duction quality. Please contact your
BMW center to find out for which mobile
phones there are snap-in adapters available.
For your safety
A car phone makes life more convenient in
many ways, and can even save lives in an emer-
gency. While you should consult your mobile
phone's separate operating instructions for a
detailed description of safety precautions and
information, we request that you direct your
particular attention to the following:
Only make entries when the traffic situa-
tion allows you to do so. Do not hold the
mobile phone in your hand while you are driving;
use the hands-free system instead. If you do
not observe this precaution, your being dis-
tracted can endanger vehicle occupants and
other road users.<
Suitable mobile phones
Please ask your BMW center which mobile
phones with Bluetooth interface are supported
by the mobile phone preparation package and
which mobile phones are compatible with the
snap-in adapter. By virtue of their particular
software versions, these mobile phones sup-
port the functions described in this Owner's
Manual. Malfunctions may occur with other
mobile phones.
Operating options
You can operate the mobile phone using:
> Buttons on the steering wheel, refer to
page 10
> iDrive, refer to page 16
> Voice commands
*, refer to page 192
> Programmable memory keys, refer to
page 20
Avoid operating a mobile phone recognized by
the vehicle via the mobile phone's keypad; oth-
erwise, malfunctions may result.
Start-up
Pairing the mobile phone with the
vehicle
The following prerequisites must be met:
> Compatible mobile phone: the mobile
phone is supported by the full preparation
package mobile phone. You can obtain
information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
> The mobile phone is ready to operate.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
185
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
> Bluetooth has been activated in the vehicle,
refer to page 187, and on the mobile phone.
> Depending on the mobile phone, certain
settings may be necessary on the mobile
phone, e.g. via the following menu items:
> Bluetooth switched on
> Connection must be allowed without
requiring further confirmation
> Reconnection
> Depending on the mobile phone type, the
power-saving mode setting, for example,
may result in a paired mobile phone not
being detected by the vehicle.
> For pairing purposes, define any 4 to 16-
digit number as a Bluetooth passkey,
e.g. 25081107. A long and complex number
offers the best protection against unautho-
rized access. This Bluetooth passkey is no
longer required after pairing is successful.
> The ignition is switched on.
Pair the mobile phone with the vehicle
only when the car is stationary, to avoid
endangering the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
Switch on ignition
1. Insert remote control all the way into the
ignition lock.
2. Switch on ignition without operating the
brake or clutch or pressing the start/stop
button.
Preparation via iDrive
3. "Telephone"
4. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
5. "Add new phone"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle is dis-
played.
Preparation via the mobile phone
6. Further steps must be carried out with the
mobile phone and vary depending on the
model. Please refer to your mobile phone's
operating instructions, e.g. under the topics
of Searching for a Bluetooth device, Linking
or Pairing.
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle appears
on the mobile phone display.
7. Select the Bluetooth name of the vehicle on
the mobile phone display.
Pairing
Depending on your mobile phone, you will see
messages, first on the mobile phone display or
on the iDrive, requesting you to enter the same
Bluetooth passkey previously determined by
you.
8. Enter the Bluetooth passkey.
Depending on the mobile phone, you will
have approx. 30 seconds to enter your
Bluetooth passkey on the mobile phone
and the Control Display.
If the pairing was successful, the mobile phone
appears at the top of the list of mobile phones.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
186
Following the initial pairing
> The mobile phone is detected/connected in
the vehicle within a short time if the engine
is running or the ignition is switched on.
> As soon as a mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the phone book entries stored
on the SIM card or on your mobile phone are
transmitted to the vehicle. This transmis-
sion is dependent on your mobile phone,
refer to the operating instructions of the
mobile phone if necessary, and can take
several minutes.
> Four mobile phones can be paired.
> Specific settings may be necessary in some
mobile phones, e.g. authorization or a
secure connection, refer to the mobile
phone operating instructions.
If not all phone book entries are displayed:
> Transfer all phone book entries from the
SIM card to the mobile phone, if necessary.
> Phone book entries with special characters
may not be displayed.
Checks to perform if pairing is
unsuccessful
> Is the mobile phone supported by the
mobile phone preparation package? You
can obtain information on the Internet at:
www.bmw.com/bluetooth
> Do the Bluetooth passkeys on the mobile
phone and vehicle match? The same Blue-
tooth passkey must be entered on the
mobile phone's display and via iDrive.
> Did it take you more than 30 seconds to
enter the Bluetooth passkey? Then repeat
the pairing procedure.
> Are too many Bluetooth devices connected
to the mobile phone? If so, delete the con-
nections with other devices on the mobile
phone.
> Is the mobile phone no longer responding?
Switch the mobile phone off and on or
briefly disconnect the power supply.
> Repeat the pairing procedure.
> If all items on the list have been checked
and the mobile phone still cannot be paired,
please contact Customer Relations.
Connecting a particular mobile phone
If more than one mobile phone is detected by
the vehicle, the mobile phone at the top of the
list is connected. A different mobile phone can
be connected by selecting it.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Select the desired mobile phone.
Unpairing the mobile phone from the
vehicle
1. "Telephone"
2. "Bluetooth (telephone)"
3. Highlight the mobile phone that is to be
unpaired.
4. Open "Options".
5. "Remove phone from list"
The unpaired mobile phone is deleted from
the list.
The phone book entries and the lists of
stored phone numbers are deleted as well.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
187
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Activating/deactivating the
Bluetooth link
The use of Bluetooth technology is not
permitted in all countries. Observe all
applicable local regulations. Temporarily deac-
tivate the Bluetooth link between the vehicle
and the mobile phone, if necessary.
If the Bluetooth link is deactivated, you can no
longer operate the mobile phone via the vehicle,
and other devices with a Bluetooth interface
can be used in combination with the mobile
phone, e.g. a laptop.<
To temporarily deactivate the Bluetooth link
between the vehicle and your mobile phone:
1. "Telephone"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Bluetooth"
Adapting volumes
Turn the knob until the desired volume is set.
Adjusting the volume for:
> Ring volume
> Call volume
These volumes are maintained for the hands-
free system, even if you set the other audio
sources to minimum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Operation via iDrive
You can operate the following functions using
iDrive:
> Accepting/rejecting calls
> dialing phone numbers
> Selecting phone numbers from the phone
book
> Selecting stored phone numbers, e.g. from
the list of received calls
> Ending a call
When the ignition is switched off or in radio
readiness, e.g. after taking the remote control
out of the ignition lock, you can continue an
ongoing call via the hands-free system for sev-
eral minutes.
Voice quality
If the person you are talking to is having difficul-
ties understanding you, this may be due to
excessive background noise. The full prepara-
tion package mobile phone can compensate for
these noises to a certain extent. To optimize
voice quality during a call, we recommend that
you:
> Reduce background noise, e.g. by closing
the windows, reducing air flow from the
automatic climate control or pointing the
open front air vents downward.
> Reduce the volume of the hands-free sys-
tem.
Requirements
> The mobile phone's pairing data are
stored by the vehicle and the mobile phone
is operational.
> The engine is running or the ignition is
switched on.
> The mobile phone is recognized by the
vehicle.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
188
Receiving calls
If you have the phone number of the caller
stored in the phone book and the phone num-
ber has been transmitted, the name of the entry
is displayed.
Accepting a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
"Accept"
Rejecting a call
"Reject"
The caller is diverted to your mailbox if the mail-
box was activated.
Ending a call
Press the button on the steering wheel
or
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. Select an active call.
Dialing phone numbers
1. "Telephone"
2. "Dial number"
3. Select the digits individually.
4. Select this symbol to establish the con-
nection
or
press the button on the steering wheel.
The phone number can also be entered using
voice commands
*, refer to page 192.
For your phone number to be displayed to the
person you are talking to, the display of phone
numbers must be enabled by your provider.
Calls with multiple parties
You can switch between calls and combine two
calls to a single conference call. These func-
tions must be supported by the mobile phone
and the service provider.
Accepting a call while speaking to
another party
This function depends on the service provider
and may have to be enabled. The mobile phone
may have to be set up accordingly.
If a second call comes in during an active call,
you will hear a call waiting signal.
"Accept"
The call is accepted and the existing call is
put on hold.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
189
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Establishing a second call
Establish another call during an active call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Active calls"
3. "Hold"
The existing call is put on hold.
4. Dial the new phone number or select it from
a list.
Switching between two calls, toggling
> Active call: indicated by a red handset
> Call on hold: indicated by a green handset
To switch to the call on hold, select this hand-
set.
Establishing a conference call
Two calls can be connected to a single tele-
phone conference call.
1. Establish two calls.
2. "Conference call"
When terminating a conference call, both calls
are ended. If the call is terminated by one of the
other parties, the other conversation may be
continued.
Phone book
The phone book accesses the contacts* and
shows all contacts for which a phone number
has been stored. The entries can be selected to
make a call.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Phone book"
All contacts with a phone number are displayed.
A symbol indicates the storage location of the
contacts.
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a des-
tination.
Mobile phone
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
190
Calling a contact
1. Select the desired contact.
A connection is established immediately if
calling contacts with one phone number.
For contacts with several phone numbers:
2. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
The entries in the contacts can be changed.
When a contact from the mobile phone is
changed, the changes are not stored on the
mobile phone. A copy of the entry is stored in
the vehicle.
1. Highlight the contact.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Edit entry"
The contact can be edited.
Redialing
The eight phone numbers dialed last are stored.
Dialing the number via iDrive
1. "Telephone"
2. "Redial"
3. Select the desired entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries individually or deleting
all entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact in vehicle"
Received calls
The 20 calls that were last received are dis-
played.
1. "Telephone"
2. "Received calls"
Calling a number from the list
Select an entry.
The connection is established.
Deleting entries individually or deleting
all entries
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete entry" or "Delete list".
Symbol Meaning
Contact with one phone
number.
Contact with more than one
phone number.
Call not possible. Mobile
phone has no reception or
network or does not have
Teleservice Call
* activated.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
191
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Saving an entry in the contacts
1. Highlight an entry.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store as new contact" or "Add to existing
contact".
4. Select the type of number: "Home", "Busi-
ness", "Mobile" or "Other".
5. Complete the entries if necessary.
6. "Store contact"
Messages
Various types of messages can be displayed:
> Messages from My info
> Messages from the BMW Concierge ser-
vice
Displaying messages
1. "Telephone"
2. "Messages"
3. Select the desired message.
My Info
To start destination guidance:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired destination.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
To dial the number in the message:
1. Select the message that contains the
desired number.
2. "Call"
Messages from the concierge service
To use the address in destination guidance*:
1. Select the message.
2. "Start guidance" or "Add as another
dest.".
3. Start destination guidance, if necessary.
To dial a phone number:
1. Select the message.
2. "Call"
To save an address:
1. Select the message.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Store contact in vehicle"
Deleting messages
1. Select the message to be deleted.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Delete message" or "Delete all messages"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
192
Switching between mobile
phone and hands-free system
From mobile phone to hands-free
system*
You can continue ongoing calls outside of the
vehicle's Bluetooth range via the hands-free
system as long as the engine is running or the
ignition is switched on. Depending on your
mobile phone, the system automatically
switches to hands-free mode.
With mobile phones that do not automatically
switch to hands-free mode:
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may be possible to continue the con-
versation via the hands-free system. Refer to
the display on your mobile phone and/or your
mobile phone's operating instructions.
From hands-free system to mobile
phone
If you are making a call via the hands-free sys-
tem, it may be possible to continue the call via
the mobile phone, depending on your mobile
phone model. Refer to the display on your
mobile phone and/or your mobile phone's oper-
ating instructions.
Alternatively, you can deactivate the Bluetooth
link, refer to page 187.
Depending on the type of mobile phone you are
using, it may occur that calls are switched from
the hands-free system to the mobile phone if
reception of the wireless network is poor.
Operation by voice
commands*
The concept
> You can operate your mobile phone without
having to take a hand off the steering wheel.
> {...} Verbal instructions to use with the voice
activation system.
Requirements
The same prerequisites apply as for operation
via iDrive, refer to page 187.
Saying commands
Activating voice activation system
1. Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel.
A sound signal indicates that you can say
commands.
2. Say the command.
Ending/canceling operation by voice
commands
Briefly press the button on the steering
wheel or
In dialogs not involving voice commands, i.e.
when you are speaking only text, e.g. a name,
canceling is possible only via the button on the
steering wheel.
Having the possible commands read
aloud
The system recognizes specific commands
that must be pronounced exactly word for word.
You can have the possible commands for any
function read aloud to you:
Digits from zero to nine are recognized.
You can say each digit individually or group
them into a sequence to accelerate the input.
Using alternative commands
Often there is more than a single command to
run a function, e.g.:
{Cancel}.
{Help}.
{Dial name} or {Name}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
193
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Example: dialing phone numbers
To start the dialog:
Press the button on the steering wheel.
Adjusting the volume of the
instructions
You can adjust the volume for the instructions
from the system:
Turn the button during an instruction.
This volume for the instructions is maintained,
even if the other audio sources are set to mini-
mum volume.
The setting is stored for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling
Dialing phone numbers
The connection to the desired subscriber is
established.
Correcting phone numbers
After the last spoken sequence of digits has
been repeated by the system, you can delete
this sequence of digits.
You have the option of repeating the command
{Correct number} until all of the digits have
been deleted.
Deleting phone numbers
All digits entered up to this point are deleted.
Redialing
To redial the phone number dialed last:
Voice-activated phone book*
Depending on the vehicle 's equipment, it can
be necessary to establish a separate voice-acti-
vate phone book.
For entries in the voice-activated phone book,
only use names in the language of the voice
activation system and no abbreviations.
The entries must be entered using voice com-
mands and are separate from the memory in the
mobile phone. In this case, phone numbers
stored on the mobile phone cannot be called up
or saved there using voice commands. Up to
50 entries can be set up. An entry always con-
sists of a name and a phone number.
You say Voice command response
{Dial number}{{Please say the number}}
e.g. {123 456 7890} Depending on your equipment version:
{{123 456 7890. Continue ?}}
{Dial} The system dials the displayed phone number.
1. {Dial number}.
2. Say the phone number.
For telephone calls abroad, say {Plus}
and then the country code.
3. {Dial}.
{Correct number}.
The digits are deleted.
{Delete}.
{Redial}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Telephone
194
Creating and editing a voice phone
book
To store an entry:
An entry always consists of a name and a phone
number.
To delete an entry:
You can delete any entry from the voice phone
book.
To delete all entries:
{Delete phonebook} deletes all entries in the
phone book.
To listen to and select the entries:
You can have all entries in your voice phone
book read aloud in the order in which they were
entered and select a specific entry to establish a
connection:
Selecting an entry
The connection to the phone number of the
selected entry is established.
Notes
Notes on Emergency Requests
Do not use the voice activation system to ini-
tiate an Emergency Request. In stressful situa-
tions, the voice and vocal pitch can change.
This can unnecessarily delay the establishment
of a telephone connection. Use the SOS but-
ton
* instead, refer to page 239.
Important for voice commands
For voice commands, bear in mind the follow-
ing:
> Say the commands, numbers and letters
smoothly and with normal volume,
emphasis and speed.
> Always say commands in the language of
the voice activation system.
> Keep the doors, windows, glass roof
* or
convertible top
* closed to prevent interfer-
ence from outside noise.
> Avoid ambient noise in the vehicle while
speaking.
1. {Save name}.
2. Say the name.
Saying the name for the voice phone
book should not take longer than
approx. 2 seconds.
3. Say the phone number after being
prompted to do so by the system.
4. To save the phone number:
{save}.
1. {Delete name}.
The dialog for deleting an entry opens.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
1. {Delete phonebook}.
The dialog for deleting the phone book
opens.
2. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
3. Confirm the query again with {Yes}.
1. {Read phonebook}.
The dialog for reading the phone book
opens.
2. Say {Dial number} when the desired
entry is read.
1. {Dial name}.
The dialog for selecting an entry is
opened.
2. Say the name when prompted.
3. Confirm the query with {Yes}.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
195
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Inserting/removing the
snap-in adapter*
1. Press button 1 and remove the cover.
2. Insert the snap-in adapter in the front and
press it downward until it engages.
To remove the snap-in adapter:
Press button 1.
Inserting mobile phone
1. If applicable, remove the protective cap
from the mobile phone's antenna connector
so that the mobile phone can engage in the
snap-in adapter.
2. With its buttons facing upward, slide the
mobile phone up towards the electrical con-
tact points and press it downward until it
engages.
The mobile phone's battery is charged as soon
as the vehicle is in radio readiness or the steer-
ing is unlocked.
To conserve vehicle battery power, you
should avoid using the mobile phone
when the ignition is switched off.<
Removing mobile phone
Press the button.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Contacts
196
Contacts
You can create and edit contacts. The contacts
from the mobile phone
* are displayed as well if
this function is supported by the mobile phone.
The addresses can be used as destinations for
navigation and the phone numbers can be
dialed.
New contact
1. "Contacts"
2. "New contact"
3. If the entry fields are still filled with the pre-
vious entries, select "Delete input fields".
4. To fill in the entry fields:
Select the symbol next to the entry field.
5. Enter the text.
If the vehicle is equipped with a navi-
gation system, it is only possible to
enter addresses that are contained in the
navigation data in the vehicle. This ensures
that destination guidance is possible for all
addresses.<
6. If applicable, "Store"
7. "Store contact in vehicle"
Specifying a contact as the home
address
A contact can be stored as a home address.
It is placed at the top of "My contacts".
1. "Home"
2. Create contact.
My contacts
A list of all contacts in the vehicle and on the
mobile phone
*.
Displaying contacts
1. "Contacts"
2. "My contacts"
All contacts are listed in alphabetical order.
Depending on the number of contacts, an A-Z
search is offered. A symbol indicates the stor-
age location of the contacts:
Displaying the detailed view*
Select the desired contact.
All fields that have been filled in for that contact
are displayed.
*
Symbol Storage location
No symbol In the vehicle; the address
has not been checked as a
destination.
In the vehicle; the address
has been checked as a desti-
nation.
Mobile phone
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
197
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Selecting name display
Names can be displayed in different sequences.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Display: last, first name" or "Display: first,
last name"
Depending on how the contacts were stored in
your mobile phone, the name display can differ
from the selected display.
Selecting a contact as the navigation
destination
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired address.
Contacts from the mobile phone
* may contain
addresses that do not match the navigation
data contained in the vehicle and thus cannot
be used for destination guidance. In this case:
Manually correct the address.
Checking the address as a destination*
An address that is to be used for destination
guidance must match the navigation data con-
tained in the vehicle. An address that is stored
on the mobile phone can be matched to the
navigation data.
1. Select the desired contact and highlight the
address.
2. Open "Options".
3. "Check as destination"
4. Correct and store the address, if necessary.
If the address is corrected and stored, then a
copy is created in the vehicle. The address is
not changed on the mobile phone.
Dialing a phone number*
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. Select the desired phone number.
The connection is established.
Editing a contact
1. "My contacts"
2. Select the desired contact.
3. "Edit contact"
4. Change the entries.
5. Move the controller to the left.
6. "Yes"
If a contact from the mobile phone
* is edited,
the changes are not stored on the mobile
phone. A copy of the entry is stored in the vehi-
cle, and only this copy is displayed. When cer-
tain prerequisites are met, a specifically identi-
cal contact entry is established.
Deleting contacts
Only contacts that are stored in the vehicle are
deleted. The contacts on the mobile phone
*
cannot be deleted.
1. "My contacts"
2. Highlight the contact.
3. Open "Options".
4. "Delete contact" or "Delete all contacts".
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
BMW Assist
198
BMW Assist
BMW Assist*
BMW Assist provides a number of different ser-
vices. For example, the position data of the
vehicle can be transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center when an Emergency
Request
* is sent.
Many BMW Assist services depend on the con-
tract individually agreed upon.
After your contract has expired, the BMW
Assist system will be deactivated by the BMW
Assist Response Center without you having to
visit a BMW center. After the BMW Assist sys-
tem has been deactivated, no BMW Assist ser-
vices will be available. The BMW Assist system
can be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Requirements
> The installed BMW Assist system is logged
in to a wireless communications network.
This network must be capable of transmit-
ting the services.
> To transmit position data, the vehicle must
be able to determine its current position.
> To activate and update BMW Assist, a GPS
signal must be available.
> The BMW Assist service contract was
signed with your BMW center or with the
BMW Assist Response Center. The service
must have been fully enabled.
> BMW Assist is activated.
Services offered
> Emergency Request: when you press the
SOS button, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established. The
BMW Assist Response Center then speaks
with you and takes further steps to help you.
> Automatic Collision Notification: under cer-
tain conditions, a connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center is established after
a serious accident. If possible, the BMW
Assist Response Center then speaks with
you and takes further steps to help you.
> Enhanced Roadside Assistance: BMW
Roadside Assistance
* can be contacted if
assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown. If possible, the vehicle data and
position data are transmitted during this
call.
> Customer Relations: connection to Cus-
tomer Relations for information on all
aspects of your vehicle.
> TeleService: data on your vehicle's service
status or required inspections are transmit-
ted to your BMW center, either automati-
cally before a service due date or when you
request a BMW service appointment.
> Remote Door Unlock: the BMW Assist
Response Center provides assistance if, for
example, the remote control is not available
and the vehicle needs to be opened.
> Stolen Vehicle Recovery: after you report to
the police that your vehicle was stolen, the
BMW Assist Response Center can deter-
mine its position.
> In addition, the optional Convenience Plan
offers a concierge service and information
on route planning, the traffic situation and
weather. Using Critical Calling, a limited
number of calls can be made via the BMW
Assist Response Center, for example if the
mobile phone is not available or discharged.
Press the SOS button to contact the
BMW Assist Response Center.
*
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
199
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
TeleService*
TeleService supports communication with your
BMW center.
> Data on the vehicle's service requirements
can be sent directly to the BMW center. In
this way, the BMW center can plan its work
in advance. This shortens the duration of
the service appointment.
> In the event of a breakdown, data on the
vehicle's condition can be sent directly to
Roadside Assistance
*.
> The service varies by country.
> Connection may incur charges.
> Services may be restricted abroad.
Requirements
> BMW Assist is activated.
> Wireless reception is available.
> The engine is running.
Concierge service*
When you call the BMW Assist Concierge ser-
vice, you can obtain information about, for
example, restaurants, emergency pharmacy
services, gas stations or hotels, as well as
receive the corresponding telephone numbers
and addresses.
You can then dial a phone number directly or
use an address for destination guidance
*.
Starting the concierge service
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Concierge"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to the BMW
Concierge service.
You are connected to an employee of the BMW
Concierge service to obtain the required infor-
mation. You can then have the phone number
and address sent to you and, for example, use it
for destination guidance in the navigation sys-
tem. Many hotels can be booked directly
through the BMW Assist Concierge service.
When an information message is received, a list
of the received messages is displayed automat-
ically. Open the message via the message list,
refer to page 191.
Roadside Assistance
You can call BMW Roadside Assistance*
should you require help in the event of a break-
down.
Starting Roadside Assistance
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
The BMW Roadside Assistance number is
displayed. If a mobile phone
* is paired, a
connection is established to BMW Road-
side Assistance.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
BMW Assist
200
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Roadside Assistance"
3. "Start service"
TeleService Diagnosis*
TeleService Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that are
important for vehicle diagnosis. TeleService
Diagnosis can be started after a prompt by
Roadside Assistance and termination of the
voice connection.
TeleService Help*
TeleService Help enables an in-depth diagno-
sis of the vehicle by Roadside Assistance via
wireless transmission. TeleService Help can be
started after a prompt by Roadside Assistance
and termination of the voice connection.
Starting TeleService Help
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. The engine is running.
4. "TeleService Help"
After completion of TeleService Help, a voice
connection is established to Roadside Assis-
tance.
Activating BMW Assist*
If the services included in a valid BMW Assist
subscription are not displayed, they may need
to be activated.
1. Make sure that the vehicle can determine its
current position. Reception is usually best
when you have an unobstructed view to the
sky.
2. Switch on the ignition.
3. "Activate BMW Assist"
Activation may take several minutes. If another
menu is opened, activation continues running in
the background.
BMW Search*
BMW Search is an online portal that makes cer-
tain services available for use in your vehicle,
e.g. information on restaurants along your
route.
License conditions:
This product contains NetFront Browser soft-
ware of ACCESS Co., Ltd. Copyright © 2007
ACCESS Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. NetFront
is a trademark or registered trademark of
ACCESS Co., Ltd., in Japan and other coun-
tries.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
Requirements
> Subscription to the optional
Convenience Plan.
> The vehicle is located within wireless
network coverage.
> The date setting on the Control Display
is current.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
201
EntertainmentReference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationMobility
Starting BMW Search
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "BMW Search"
3. Select "OK", if necessary.
The BMW Search start page is displayed.
Using BMW Search
To select and display content:
> Turn the controller to highlight an element.
> Press the controller to display an element.
Opening the start page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Display start page"
Loading a new page
1. Open "Options".
2. "Reload"
Canceling
1. Open "Options".
2. "Cancel loading"
Customer Relations
At a glance
Contact Customer Relations for information on
all aspects of your vehicle.
Calling Customer Relations
Vehicle equipped with BMW Assist or
BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
3. "Start service"
A voice connection is established to Customer
Relations.
Vehicle not equipped with BMW Assist
or BMW TeleService
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Customer Relations"
The Customer Relations phone number is dis-
played. If the vehicle is equipped with the
mobile phone preparation package, a voice
connection is established.
Service Request*
At a glance
You can send a request to your BMW center
to arrange a service appointment. The
TeleService data is transmitted during a
Service Request. If possible, your BMW center
will establish contact with you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
BMW Assist
202
Starting a Service Request
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service Request"
3. "Start service"
Automatic Service Request*
The TeleService data necessary for servicing
the vehicle are automatically sent to your BMW
center prior to the service deadline. If possible,
the center will contact you and a service
appointment can be arranged.
You can check when the BMW center was noti-
fied.
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Open "Options".
4. "Last Service Request"
Data transfer*
The status of the data transfer is displayed.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. Open "Options".
3. "Data transfer"
Service status*
Displaying available services
Display of all services available in the vehicle.
1. "BMW Assist"
2. "Service status"
3. "Available services"
BMW Assist, activating
If the services included in a BMW Assist sub-
scription are not displayed, they may need to be
activated.
"Activate BMW Assist"
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
This section helps you maintain your car's
mobility by supplying important information
on vital topics including fuels and lubricants,
wheels and tires, service, maintenance and
roadside assistance.
Mobility
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Refueling
206
Refueling
Always switch off the engine before refu-
eling; otherwise, fuel cannot be added to
the tank and a message will be displayed.<
Take all precautionary measures and
observe all applicable regulations when
handling fuel. Do not carry any spare fuel con-
tainers in your vehicle. They can develop a leak
and cause an explosion or cause a fire in the
event of an accident.<
Fuel filler flap
Opening
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do so, lightly
press the rear edge.
2. Turn the gas cap counterclockwise.
3. Place the gas cap in the bracket attached to
the fuel filler flap.
Closing
Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until you clearly
hear a click.
Do not pinch the band attached to the
cap; otherwise, the cap cannot be closed
properly and fuel vapors can escape. A mes-
sage will be displayed if the gas cap is loose or
missing.<
Manually releasing the fuel filler flap
In the event of a malfunction, you can release
the fuel filler flap manually:
Coupe
1. Remove the cover from the right-hand side-
wall of the cargo area.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Convertible
1. Loosen the right-hand cargo area trim panel
by turning the screws by 90°, see arrow.
2. Slightly lift the top section of the panel. It is
not necessary to remove the entire panel.
3. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
The fuel filler flap is released.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
207
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Observe the following when refueling
When handling fuels, follow the safety
instructions provided at filling stations;
otherwise, there is a risk of personal injury or
property damage.<
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle com-
pletely into the filler pipe. Avoid lifting the filler
nozzle while filling the tank, as that would lead
to
> Premature pump shutoff
> Reduced efficiency of the fuel-vapor recov-
ery system.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks
off the first time.
Fuel tank capacity
Approx. 16.1 US gallons/61 liters, including the
reserve capacity of 2.1 US gallons/8 liters.
Refuel as soon as possible once your
cruising range falls below 30 miles/
50 km; otherwise, engine functions are not
ensured and damage can occur.<
Fuel specifications
Gasoline engine: required fuel
Do not refuel with leaded fuel; otherwise,
the catalytic converter will be damaged.
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel containing
85Ξ ethanol, nor with FlexFuel. Otherwise, the
engine and fuel supply system will be dam-
aged.<
Super Premium Gasoline/AKI 91
This gasoline is highly recommended.
However, you may also use gasoline with less
AKI. The minimum AKI Rating is:
> 328i/xDrive: 87
> 335i, 335i/xDrive: 89.
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI Rat-
ing, the engine may produce knocking sounds
when starting at high outside temperatures.
This has no effect on the engine life.
Do not use any gasoline below the speci-
fied minimum fuel grade. Otherwise, the
engine could be damaged.<
Use high-quality brands
Field experience has indicated significant dif-
ferences in fuel quality: volatility, composition,
additives, etc., among gasolines offered for sale
in the United States and Canada. Fuels contain-
ing up to and including 10Ξ ethanol or other
oxygenates with up to 2.8Ξ oxygen by weight,
that is, 15Ξ MTBE or 3Ξ methanol plus an
equivalent amount of cosolvent, will not void the
applicable warranties with respect to defects in
materials or workmanship.
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
drivability, starting and stalling problems
especially under certain environmental condi-
tions such as high ambient temperature and
high altitude.
Should you encounter drivability problems
which you suspect could be related to the fuel
you are using, we recommend that you respond
by switching to a recognized high-quality brand
such as gasoline that is advertised as Top Tier
Detergent Gasoline.
Failure to comply with these recommendations
may also result in unscheduled maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
208
Wheels and tires
Tire inflation pressures
Information for your safety
It is not merely the tires' service life, but also
driving comfort and, to a great extent, driving
safety that depend on the condition of the tires
and the maintenance of the specified tire pres-
sure.
Check the tire inflation pressure regularly
and correct it, if necessary: at least twice a
month and before starting long trips. If you fail
to observe this precaution you may be driving
on tires with incorrect tire pressures, a condi-
tion that can not only compromise your vehi-
cle's driving stability, but also lead to tire dam-
age and the risk of an accident. Do not drive
with deflated, i.e. flat tires, except when using
run-flat tires. A flat tire will seriously impair your
vehicle's handling and braking response.
Attempts to drive on a flat tire can lead to loss of
control over the vehicle.<
Checking pressure
Only check tire inflation pressure when the
tires are cold. This means after a maximum of
1.25 miles/2 km driving or when the vehicle has
been parked for at least 2 hours. When tires are
warm, the tire inflation pressure is higher.
After correcting the tire inflation pressure,
reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
page 95, or reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor,
refer to page 93.<
Inflation pressure specifications
The tables below provide all the correct inflation
pressures for the specified tire sizes at ambient
temperature.
The inflation pressures apply to the tire
sizes approved and tire brands recom-
mended by BMW; a list of these is available
from your BMW center.<
For correct identification of the right tire infla-
tion pressures, observe the following:
> Tire sizes for your vehicle
> Load conditions
> Maximum allowable driving speed
Tire inflation pressures for driving up
to 100 mph or 160 km/h
For normal driving up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
and to achieve optimum driving comfort, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds up to a maximum of
100 mph or 160 km/h.
These tire inflation pressures can also be found
on the driver's side door post when the driver's
door is open.
The maximum permissible speed for
these tire pressures is 100 mph or
160 km/h. Do not exceed this speed; otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Tire inflation pressures for driving
above 100 mph or 160 km/h
In order to drive at maximum speeds in
excess of 100 mph or 160 km/h, adjust
pressures to the respective tire inflation pres-
sures listed on the following pages in the col-
umns for traveling speeds including those
exceeding 100 mph or 160 km/h. Otherwise,
tire damage and accidents could occur.<
Observe all national and local maximum speed
limits; otherwise, violations of the laws could
occur.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
209
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 44/300
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 38/260 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 38/260 42/290 49/340
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 44/300
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 46/320
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 36/250 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
210
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 328xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 V
32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 36/250 44/300
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 33/230 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 33/230 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 38/260 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 44/300
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
32/220 38/260 35/240 42/290
225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 38/260 41/280 48/330
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 32/220 39/270 41/280 48/330
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 33/230 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 33/230 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 38/260 - 46/320
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 44/300 - 46/320
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
211
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 39/270 38/260 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 38/260 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 41/280
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 41/280
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 45/310
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 39/270 38/260 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 44/300
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 32/220 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 48/330
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 44/300
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 38/260 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 48/330
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
212
Coupe: tire inflation pressures for the 335xi
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 39/270 39/270 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 39/270 45/310
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 39/270
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 39/270
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 45/310
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 39/270 39/270 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 33/230 41/280 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 35/240 - 44/300
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 39/270 - 48/330
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 39/270 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 45/310 - 48/330
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
213
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Coupe: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 32/220 39/270 38/260 45/310
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 44/300 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 33/230 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 41/280 - 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 33/230 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 41/280 - 45/310
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 49/340
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
214
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 328i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
33/230 41/280 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 33/230 41/280 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 91 W 33/230 41/280 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 39/270 46/320
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 42/290 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 42/290 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 46/320
With Sport Package:
205/55 R 16 91 H M+S
225/50 R 16 92 H M+S
33/230 41/280 36/250 44/300
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S
225/45 R 17 91 W
33/230 41/280 41/280 48/330
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 36/250 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 42/290 - 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 42/290 - 45/310
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
215
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 49/340
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
216
Convertible: tire inflation pressures for the 335i
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
Without Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 33/230 41/280 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 39/270 46/320
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 36/250 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 36/250 - 42/290
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 42/290 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 35/240 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 42/290 - 42/290
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 39/270 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 46/320
With Sport Package:
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 33/230 41/280 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/45 R 17 91 V 32/220 - 41/280 -
Rear: 255/40 R 17 94 V - 36/250 - 45/310
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 42/290 - 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 42/290 - 45/310
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 49/340
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
217
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Convertible: inflation pressures 335is
Tire size Pressure specifications in psi/kPa
Traveling speeds
up to a max. of
100 mph / 160 km/h
Traveling speeds
including those
exceeding
100 mph / 160 km/h
All pressure specifications in the table are
indicated in psi/kilopascal with cold tires.
Cold = ambient temperature
225/45 R 17 91 H M+S 33/230 41/280 39/270 46/320
225/45 R 17 94 V M+S XL 35/240 42/290 42/290 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 W 35/240 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 W - 42/290 - 49/340
Front: 225/40 R 18 88 Y 35/240 - 38/260 -
Rear: 255/35 R 18 90 Y - 42/290 - 45/310
Front: 225/35 R 19 88 Y XL 39/270 - 42/290 -
Rear: 255/30 R 19 91 Y XL - 46/320 - 49/340
More details on the permissible load and weights can be found on page 249.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
218
Tire identification marks
Knowledge of the labeling on the side of the tire
makes it easier to identify and choose the right
tires.
Tire size
Speed code letter
Q = up to 100 mph or 160 km/h
T = up to 118 mph or 190 km/h
H = up to 131 mph or 210 km/h
V = up to 150 mph or 240 km/h
W = up to 167 mph or 270 km/h
Y = up to 186 mph or 300 km/h
Tire Identification Number
Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines of
the US Department of Transportation.
DOT code:
Tire age
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding: DOT … 1010 means that the
tire was manufactured in week 10 of 2010.
BMW recommends that you replace all tires
after 6 years at most, even if some tires may last
for 10 years.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Tread wear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
DOT Quality Grades
Tread wear
Traction AA A B C
Temperature A B C
All passenger car tires must conform to
Federal Safety Requirements in addition
to these grades.<
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1γ) times as
well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, how-
ever, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteris-
tics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop
on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test sur-
faces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.<
Temperature
The temperature grades are A, the highest, B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
e.g.
Nominal width in mm
Aspect ratio in Ξ
Radial belt construction
Rim diameter in inches
Load rating,
not on ZR tires
Speed code letter, in
front of the R on ZR tires
225/45 R 1791 V
e.g.
Manufacturer's
code for tire make
Tire size and
tire design
Tire age
DOT xxxx xxx 1010
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
219
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehi-
cle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either sep-
arately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.<
RSC – run-flat tires
You will recognize run-flat tires by a circular
symbol containing the letters RSC on the side
of the tire, refer to page 220.
M+S
Winter and all-season tires.
These have better winter properties than sum-
mer tires.
XL
Designation for specially reinforced tires.
Tire condition
Inspect your tires frequently for tread wear,
signs of damage and for foreign objects lodged
in the tread. Check the tread depth.
Minimum tread depth
The tread depth should not drop below 0.12 in/
3 mm, although, for example, European legisla-
tion only specifies a minimum tread depth of
0.063 in/1.6 mm. At tread depths below 0.12 in/
3 mm there is an increased risk of high-speed
hydroplaning, even when only small amounts of
water are present on the road surface.
When winter tires wear down past a tread depth
of 0.16 in/4 mm, they become perceptibly less
suitable for winter conditions. In the interest of
safety, new tires should be installed.
Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove
are distributed around the tire's circumference;
the letters TWI, for Tread Wear Indicator, on the
tire's sidewalls identify tires that incorporate
these wear indicators. Once the tire tread has
worn down to the wear indicators, the tire has
worn to a depth of 0.063 in/1.6 mm.
Wheel/tire damage
Please note that low-profile tires cause wheels,
tires and suspension parts to be more suscep-
tible to road hazard and consequential dam-
ages.
Unusual vibrations encountered during normal
vehicle operation can indicate tire failure or
some other vehicle defect. This can, for exam-
ple, be caused by driving over curbs. The same
applies to any other abnormal road behavior,
such as pulling severely to the right or left.
In these cases, reduce speed immedi-
ately and have wheels and tires thor-
oughly checked. To do so, drive carefully to the
nearest BMW center or tire shop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. If necessary,
have the vehicle towed there.
Otherwise, tire damage can pose a lethal hazard
to vehicle occupants and other road users.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Wheels and tires
220
Tire age
For various reasons, such as the development
of brittleness, BMW recommends tire replace-
ment after no more than 6 years, regardless of
the actual wear of the tires.
The manufacturing date of tires is contained in
the tire coding:
DOT ... 1010 means that the tire was manufac-
tured in week 10 of 2010.
Run-flat tires
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall.
Run-flat tires comprise a conditionally self-sup-
porting tire and a special rim. The reinforce-
ment in the sidewalls ensures that the tire can
continue to be used subject to certain restric-
tions, even if depressurized.
For information on continuing to drive with a flat
tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire, page 93.
New wheels and tires
Have new wheels and tires installed only
by your BMW center or tire shop that
works according to BMW repair procedures
with correspondingly trained personnel. If this
work is not carried out properly, there is a dan-
ger of subsequent damage and related safety
hazards. Make sure that the new wheels are bal-
anced.<
Retreaded tires
BMW recommends that you do not use
retreaded tires, since driving safety may
be impaired. The causes for this include poten-
tially different tire casing structures and often
wide variations in tire age, which can result in a
limited service life.<
Correct wheels and tires
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
BMW recommends that you use only
wheel and tire combinations that BMW
has tested and approved for your particular
vehicle. Variations in factors such as manufac-
turing tolerances mean that even wheels and
tires with identical official size ratings could
actually have different dimensions, which could
lead to body contact and thus to severe acci-
dents. If non-approved wheels and tires are
used, BMW cannot evaluate their suitability,
and therefore cannot guarantee their driving
safety.<
You can inquire about the right wheel/tire com-
bination at your BMW center.
The correct combination of wheels and tires is
also necessary to ensure reliable operation of
various vehicle systems such as ABS, DSC or
FTM.
To maintain good handling and vehicle
response, use only tires of a single brand and
tread configuration. After a tire has been dam-
aged, mount the previous wheel and tire combi-
nation again as soon as possible.
Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM electronics
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires, or vice versa, only
use wheels with TPM electronics; otherwise,
the Tire Pressure Monitor may not be able to
detect a puncture, refer to page 94. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
221
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Recommended tire brands
Certain makes of tire are recommended by
BMW for each tire size. They are marked with a
clearly visible BMW designation on the sidewall
of the tire.
When properly used, these tires meet the high-
est standards in terms of safety and handling
characteristics.
Special characteristics of winter tires
BMW recommends winter tires for driving on
winter roads or at temperatures below +457/
+76. Although all-season M+S tires provide
better winter traction than summer tires, they
generally fail to provide the same levels of cold-
weather performance as winter tires.
Pay attention to speed
Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tires mounted on your car; failure
to do so could result in tire damage and acci-
dents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tires, a label stating the
maximum permitted speed for the mounted
tires must be displayed in your field of view.
Specialist tire dealers and your BMW center
can supply these labels.
Storage
Always store wheels and tires in a cool, dry
place with as little exposure to light as possible.
Always protect tires against all contact with oil,
grease and fuels. Do not exceed the maximum
tire inflation pressure indicated on the sidewall
of the tire.
Swapping wheels between axles
BMW advises against swapping wheels
between the front and rear axles, even if all tires
have the same size, as this could impair driving
characteristics. If the tires are of mixed sizes,
swapping wheels between the axles is not per-
missible.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. Consult your BMW center for
more information.
Snow chains must be mounted in pairs and on
the rear wheels only. Observe the manufac-
turer's instructions when mounting snow
chains. Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph or
50 km/h.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor if
snow chains are mounted; otherwise, the
instrument might issue an incorrect reading.
When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, refer to
page 90.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Under the hood
222
Under the hood
Do not work on the car unless you pos-
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the vehicle performed
only by a BMW center or by a workshop that
work according to BMW repair procedures with
correspondingly trained personnel. If this work
is not carried out properly, there is a danger of
subsequent damage and related safety haz-
ards.<
Hood
Releasing
Pull the lever.
Opening
In order to avoid damage, make sure that
the wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the hood. Do not open the
engine hood before the engine has cooled
down; otherwise, injuries may result.<
Press the release handle and open the hood.
Closing
Let the hood drop from a height of approx.
10 in/25 cm. It must be clearly heard to engage.
Make sure that the closing path of the
hood is clear; otherwise, injuries may
result.
If you see any signs while driving your vehicle
that the hood is not completely closed, stop at
once and close it securely.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
223
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Expansion tank for coolant, refer to
page 226
2 Washer fluid filler neck for headlamp clean-
ing system and window washer system,
refer to page 66
3 Jump-starting connection, refer to
page 239
4 Filler neck for engine oil, refer to Adding
engine oil
Engine oil
The engine oil consumption is dependent on
driving style and driving conditions.
Checking oil level
Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
For a precise measurement and display of the
oil level, it is necessary that the engine be at
operating temperature, i.e. after uninterrupted
driving for at least approx. 6.2 miles/10 km. You
can have the oil level displayed while you are
driving, or while the vehicle is at a standstill on a
level surface and the engine is running.
Display in the instrument cluster
1. Push button 1 in the turn indicator lever up
or down repeatedly until the appropriate
symbol is shown in the display, accompa-
nied by the word "OIL".
2. Press button 2 in the turn indicator lever.
The oil level is checked and the reading
displayed.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Under the hood
224
Possible displays
1 Oil level OK
2 Oil level is being checked.
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface, or about
5 minutes while the car is on the move.
3 Oil level down to minimum:
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil on page 225.
4 Oil level is too high.
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
5 The oil level sensor is defective.
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 80. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Display via iDrive
1. "Vehicle Info"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
Possible messages
> "Engine oil level OK"
> "Measurement not possible at this time."
> "Measuring engine oil level...":
This can take about 3 minutes if the car is at
a standstill on a level surface and the engine
is running, and about 5 minutes while the
car is moving.
If engine oil was added, it may take up to
30 minutes to obtain an oil level reading.
> "Engine oil level below minimum. Add 1
quart!"
Add engine oil as soon as possible, but no
more than 1 US quart/1 liter, refer also to
Adding engine oil below.
If the oil level is below the minimum value,
add engine oil immediately to avoid engine
damage.
> "Engine oil level too high! Have this
checked."
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
225
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Too much oil will harm the engine.
Have the vehicle checked without
delay.<
> "Measurement inactive. Have this
checked."
Do not add engine oil. You can continue
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis-
tance remaining to the next oil service, refer
to page 80. Have the system checked as
soon as possible.
Adding engine oil
Add up to 1 US quart/1 liter of engine oil only
after a corresponding message is shown on the
Control Display.
Add oil within the next 125 miles/200 km;
otherwise, the engine could be dam-
aged.<
Keep oils, greases, etc. out of the reach of
children and comply with the relevant
warnings on the containers. Otherwise, health
hazards may result.<
Oil change
Have oil changed only at your BMW center or at
a workshop that works according to BMW
repair procedures with correspondingly trained
personnel.
Oil types
Do not use oil additives as this could
result in engine damage.<
Specified engine oils
Your service center can advise you on which
engine oils have been approved by the manu-
facturer of your vehicle.
The engine oil quality is critical for the life of the
engine.
Approved oils can be identified by the following
specification:
Approved oils belong to the following viscosity
classes: SAE0W-40, SAE0W-30, SAE5W-40
and SAE 5W-30.
Alternative oil types
If approved oils are not available, you can use
quantities of up to 1 US quart/1 liter of another
oil with the following specifications:
API SM or higher
Gasoline engine
Preferred: BMW Longlife-01
BMW Longlife-01 FE
Alternatively: BMW Longlife-98
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Under the hood
226
Coolant
Do not add coolant to the cooling system
when the engine is hot. Escaping coolant
can cause burns.<
Coolant consists of half water and half additive.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for your BMW. Ask your BMW center
for suitable additives.
Only use suitable additives; otherwise,
engine damage may result. Because
additives are harmful to your health, it is impor-
tant to follow the instructions on the contain-
ers.<
Comply with the appropriate environ-
mental protection regulations when dis-
posing of coolant additives.<
Checking coolant level
1. Do not open the engine hood before the
engine has cooled down.
2. Turn the cap of the expansion tank a little
counterclockwise to allow any accumulated
pressure to escape, then continue turning
to open.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
the maximum and minimum marks in the
filler neck, refer also to the diagram next to
the filler neck.
4. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant up to
the specified level; do not overfill.
5. Turn the cap until there is an audible click.
6. Have the reason for the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
227
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Maintenance
BMW Maintenance System
The BMW Maintenance System supports the
preservation of the traffic and operating safety
of your BMW. The objective is to optimize
efforts with respect to minimal vehicle mainte-
nance costs.
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com-
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig-
nificant benefit.
Condition Based Service CBS
Sensors and special algorithms take the differ-
ent driving conditions of your BMW into
account. Condition Based Service uses this to
determine the current and future service
requirements. By letting you define a service
and maintenance regimen that reflects your
own individual requirements, the system builds
the basis for trouble-free driving.
On the Control Display, you can have the
remaining times or distances for selected main-
tenance tasks and any legally prescribed dates
displayed, refer to page 80:
> Engine oil
> Brake pads: separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
> Legally mandated inspections depending
on local regulations
Service data in the remote control
Your vehicle continuously stores service-
requirement information in the remote control
while you are driving. Your BMW Service Advi-
sor can read out this data from the remote con-
trol unit, and propose an optimized mainte-
nance approach. Whenever you take your car in
for servicing you should therefore hand your
BMW Service Advisor the remote control unit
that you last used.
Make sure that the date is always set cor-
rectly, refer to page 84; otherwise, the
effectiveness of Condition Based Service CBS
is not assured.<
Service and Warranty Information
Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for
Canadian models
Please consult your Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models and Warranty
and Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models
for additional information on service require-
ments.
BMW recommends that you have service
and repair operations performed at your
BMW center.
Take the time to ensure that these service pro-
cedures are confirmed by entries in your vehi-
cle's Service and Warranty Information Booklet
for US models and Warranty and Service Guide
Booklet for Canadian models. These entries
verify that your vehicle has received the speci-
fied regular maintenance.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Maintenance
228
Socket for Onboard
Diagnosis OBD
On the driver's side is an OBD socket for check-
ing components relevant to the composition of
the vehicle's emissions.
Emissions
The warning lamp lights up:
The vehicle is producing higher emis-
sions. The trip can be continued. Have
the car checked as soon as possible.
Canadian models display this warning
lamp.
The lamp flashes under certain conditions. This
indicates excessive misfiring in the engine. If
this happens, you should reduce your speed
and visit your nearest BMW center as soon as
possible. Severe engine misfiring can quickly
lead to serious damage of emissions-related
components, especially the catalytic converter.
The warning lamp comes on if the gas
cap is not properly tightened and the
OBD system assumes that fuel vapor
is escaping. Make sure that the gas cap is
correctly positioned and close it until it audibly
clicks.
Data memory
Your vehicle records data about the operation,
faults, and user settings. These data are stored
in the vehicle and in extract form, in the remote
control, and can be read out using suitable
devices at your BMW center. The data that are
read out are used to support service proce-
dures and repairs or to optimize and expand
vehicle functions. If you have a BMW Assist
contract, certain vehicle data can also be trans-
mitted directly from the vehicle in order to
enable the desired services.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
229
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Care
Care products
Regular cleaning and care contributes signifi-
cantly to the value retention of your BMW.
BMW recommends cleaning and caring for your
vehicle with products that are approved by
BMW for this purpose.
Your BMW center will be happy to advise you on
the products and services available for cleaning
and caring for your BMW.
Original BMW Care Products have been
material tested, laboratory checked and
proven in the field, and offer optimal care and
protection for your vehicle.<
Do not use cleaners that contain alcohol
or solvents as these may result in dam-
age.<
Cleaning agents can contain substances
that are dangerous or hazardous to your
health. Therefore, follow the warning and safety
instructions on the packaging. When cleaning
inside the vehicle, always open the doors or
windows of the vehicle. In enclosed areas, pro-
vide for sufficient ventilation. Only use products
designed for cleaning vehicles.<
Exterior care
Washing the vehicle
Especially during the winter months,
ensure that the vehicle is washed more
frequently. Heavy soiling and road salt can lead
to vehicle damage.<
After washing the vehicle, apply the
brakes briefly to dry them; otherwise,
water can reduce braking efficiency over the
short term and the brake discs can corrode.<
Automatic car washes
Preference should be given to cloth car washes.
Do not use high-pressure car washes;
otherwise, water may drip into the vehicle
around the windows.<
Before driving into a car wash, ensure that it is
suitable for your BMW. Check the following:
> Dimensions of your vehicle, refer to
page 247.
> If necessary: fold in the exterior mirrors,
refer to page 50.
> Maximum permissible tire width.
Avoid car washes with guide rail heights
over 4 in/10 cm; otherwise, there is the
danger of damaging chassis parts.<
Preparations before driving into an automatic
car wash:
> Unscrew the rod antenna
*.
> Deactivate the rain sensor
* to prevent
unintentional wiping.
> Remove additional add-on parts,
e.g. spoilers or phone antennas, if they
could be damaged.
Automatic transmission
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Move the selector lever to position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Care
230
Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
Before driving into an automatic car wash, per-
form the following steps to ensure that the vehi-
cle can roll:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock, even with Comfort Access.
2. Engage transmission position N.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Switch off the engine.
5. Leave the remote control in the ignition lock
so that the vehicle can roll.
The transmission is switched into position P:
> automatically after approx. 30 minutes
> if you remove the infrared remote control
from the ignition lock
Steam jets/high-pressure washers
When using steam jets or high-pressure
washers, ensure that you maintain suffi-
cient clearance to the vehicle and do not exceed
a temperature of 1407/606.
Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure or
temperature can lead to component damage or
water penetration. Follow the operating instruc-
tions of the high-pressure washer.<
When using high-pressure washers, do
not spray against the sensors and cam-
eras, e.g. of the Park Distance Control or Rear
View Camera, for an extended period and main-
tain a distance of at least 1 ft/30 cm.<
Manual car wash
When washing the vehicle by hand, use large
quantities of water and car shampoo if neces-
sary. Clean the vehicle with a sponge or wash-
ing brush, applying light pressure only.
Before cleaning the windshield, deacti-
vate the rain sensor or switch off the igni-
tion to prevent unintentional activation of the
wipers.<
Observe local regulations pertaining to
washing vehicles by hand.<
Headlamps
Do not rub them dry and do not use abrasive or
corrosive cleaning agents.
Loosen dirt, e.g. insects, with shampoo or
insect remover and wash away with copious
quantities of water.
Thaw ice with a windshield deicer and do not
use an ice scraper.
Windows
Clean the inside and outside surfaces of the
windows and the mirrors with window cleaner.
Do not clean the mirrors with cleaners
containing quartz.<
Convertible: retractable hardtop
Proceed as you would in a normal car wash.
When you open a wet hardtop, water
drops may run into the cargo area. If nec-
essary, remove items from the cargo area
beforehand to avoid water stains or soiling.<
Paintwork care
Regular care contributes to value retention and
protects the paintwork against the long-term
effects of damaging substances.
Region-specific environmental influences can
damage the vehicle paintwork. Therefore, it is
important to adapt the frequency and scope of
car care accordingly.
Immediately remove aggressive materials such
as spilled fuel, oil, grease, brake fluid, tree sap or
bird droppings to prevent damage to the paint-
work.
Repairing paintwork damage
Immediately repair scratches or similar
damage, such as that caused by stones
hitting the vehicle, where necessary to prevent
rusting.<
BMW recommends having paintwork damage
repaired by a professional paint repair work-
shop according to BMW specifications using
original BMW paint materials.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
231
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Preservation
A preservation treatment is necessary when
water no longer beads off the clean paintwork
surface. Only use products for paintwork pres-
ervation that contain carnauba or synthetic
waxes.
Rubber seals
Treat only with water or rubber care products.
Do not use silicon-containing care prod-
ucts on rubber seals; otherwise, noise
and damage could occur.<
Chrome parts
Carefully clean vehicle parts such as the radia-
tor grill, door handles or window frames with
copious quantities of water and a shampoo
additive, especially when roads are treated with
deicing salt. For additional treatment, use a
chrome polish.
Light-alloy wheels
For technical reasons, dust is generated during
braking that is deposited on the light-alloy
wheels. Remove the dust regularly using acid-
free rim cleaner.
Do not use aggressive, acidic, strongly
alkaline and abrasive cleaning agents or
steam jets over 1407/606; otherwise, dam-
age may occur.<
Outside sensors/cameras
Keep the sensors and cameras on the
outside of the vehicle, e.g. those for Park
Distance Control, clean and free of ice to ensure
that they remain fully functional.<
Interior care
Upholstery fabrics/cloth trims/
Alcantara fabrics
Vacuum regularly with a vacuum cleaner to
remove superficial dirt.
To remove severe spots such as stains from
beverages, use a soft sponge or lint-free
microfiber cloth and suitable interior cleaners.
Follow the instructions on the packaging.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams
using a sweeping motion. Avoid strong
rubbing.<
Opened Velcro fasteners on pants or
other articles of clothing can damage the
seat covers. Ensure that Velcro fasteners are
closed.<
Leather/leather trim
The leather used by BMW is a high quality
natural product. Slight irregularities in the
leather are a typical characteristic of natural
leather.<
Dust and road grit in the pores and folds of the
leather have an abrasive effect, leading to
increased wear and causing the leather surface
to become brittle prematurely. Therefore, fre-
quently clean the leather of dust using a cloth or
vacuum cleaner.
Clean light-colored leather more frequently as
dust and dirt are more noticeable.
Treat the leather at least once every two
months using a leather lotion as dirt and grease
will gradually attack the leather's protective
layer.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Care
232
Carpet/floor mats*
The floor mats can be removed for cleaning.
When heavily soiled, clean carpets with a
microfiber cloth and water or textile cleaner.
Rub back and forth in the direction of travel; oth-
erwise, the carpet may become matted.
Interior plastic parts
> Imitation leather surfaces
> Lamp glasses
> Display pane of instrument cluster
> Matte parts
Clean with water and solvent-free plastic
cleaner if necessary.
Fine wood parts
Clean fine wood trim and fine wood parts with
a damp cloth. Wipe dry with a soft cloth.
Safety belts
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action and
thus have a negative impact on safety.
Do not clean chemically, as this may
destroy the webbing.<
Interior sensors/cameras
To clean interior sensors and cameras, e.g. of
the high-beam assistant, use a lint-free cloth
moistened with glass cleaner.
Displays
To clean displays, e.g. of the radio or instrument
cluster, use a cleaning cloth for displays or a
soft, non-abrasive, lint-free cloth.
Avoid applying excessive pressure when
cleaning the displays; otherwise, damage
may occur.<
Do not use chemical or abrasive house-
hold cleaning agents. Keep all types of
fluid away from the device. Otherwise, surfaces
or electrical components may be corroded or
damaged.<
CD/DVD drives
Do not use a cleaning CD, as it may
damage parts of the drive.<
Vehicle storage
If your vehicle is to be decommissioned for
longer than three months, your BMW center or
a workshop that operates according to BMW
specifications will be glad to advise you.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
233
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Replacing components
Onboard vehicle tool kit
Coupe
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a com-
partment on the right-hand side of the cargo
area. Remove the cover.
Convertible
The onboard vehicle tool kit is stored in a pouch
under the cargo area floor panel.
Wiper blades
1. Fold out the wiper arm and hold it.
2. Press together the locking spring, arrows 1,
and fold out the wiper blade, arrow 2.
3. Take the wiper blade out of the catch mech-
anism, pulling the blade toward the front.
To avoid damage, make sure that the
wiper arms are against the windshield
before you open the engine compartment.<
Lamps and bulbs
Lamps and bulbs make an essential contribu-
tion to vehicle safety. They should, therefore,
be handled carefully. BMW recommends hav-
ing your BMW center perform any work that you
do not feel competent to perform yourself or
that is not described here.
Never touch the glass of new bulbs with
your bare fingers, as even minute
amounts of contamination will burn into the
bulb's surface and reduce its service life. Use a
clean tissue, cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base.<
You can obtain a selection of replacement bulbs
at your BMW center.
Only change bulbs while they are cool to
the touch; otherwise, you could suffer
burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question; otherwise, short-circuits
could result. To avoid possible injury or equip-
ment damage when replacing bulbs, observe
any instructions provided by the bulb manu-
facturer.<
For care of the headlamps, please follow the
instructions in the chapter entitled 'Care'.
If the routine for changing a particular
bulb is not described here, please contact
your BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LED
Light-emitting diodes installed behind translu-
cent lenses serve as the light source for many of
the controls, displays, and equipment in your
vehicle. These light-emitting diodes, which
operate using a concept similar to that applied
in conventional lasers, are officially designated
as Class 1 light-emitting diodes.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Replacing components
234
Do not remove the covers or expose the
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
for several hours; otherwise, this could cause
irritation of the retina.<
Headlight lenses
In cool or humid weather, condensation may
form on the interior of outside lamps. When the
light is switched on, the condensation will dis-
appear after a short time. The headlight lenses
do not need to be replaced.
At high humidities, e.g. water droplets may form
in the lights; have these checked by your BMW
center.,
Xenon lamps
These bulbs have a very long service life and are
highly unlikely to fail. If a xenon lamp fails never-
theless, switch on the fog lamps and continue
the journey with great care, provided that local
legislation does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon lamp system,
including bulb replacements, performed
only by a BMW center or a workshop that works
according to BMW repair procedures with cor-
respondingly trained personnel. Otherwise, if
such work is carried out improperly, the high
voltage in the system presents the danger of
fatal injuries.<
Access to the lamps
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the upper cover from the head-
lamp. To do so, use a screwdriver to press
the catches towards the rear, see arrows,
and pull the cover forward and out.
Follow the same steps in reverse order to reat-
tach the cover.
Be careful when installing the cover; oth-
erwise, leaks could occur and cause dam-
age to the headlamp system.<
Parking lamps and roadside parking
lamps, daytime running lights*
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Corner-illuminating lamp*
H3 bulb, 55 watts
1. Switch off the lamps and take the remote
control out of the ignition lock.
2. Remove the cover, refer to Access to the
lamps.
3. Push the wire bracket out of the anchor
towards the right and fold it up.
4. Disconnect the plug, change the bulb and
reconnect the plug.
5. Insert the bulb.
6. Fold the wire bracket down and engage it.
7. Reattach the cover.
Turn signals, front
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
235
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Side turn signals
W5W bulb, 5 watts
1. Press the front edge of the lamp toward the
rear with your fingertip, arrow 1 and pivot it
out, arrow 2.
2. While simultaneously lifting the retaining
tab, rotate bulb holder to the left and
remove.
3. Remove lamp and replace it.
To install, insert rear end of the lamp and press
into place at the front.
Tail lamps
Coupe: at a glance
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Backup lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Parking/tail lamps
4 Turn signal
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Parking/tail lamps
Convertible: at a glance
The tail lamps are divided in two parts. One part
is in the trunk lid, the other is in the fender.
1 Backup lamp
2 Brake lamp
3 Parking/tail lamps
4 Turn signal
5 Brake Force Display lamp
6 Parking/tail lamps
Backup lamp
If these lamps malfunction, please contact your
BMW center.
Turn signal, brake, license plate,
parking, and tail lamps
These lamps use LED technology for operation.
If they malfunction, please contact your BMW
center.
Coupe: two-stage brake light in the
trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Replacing components
236
1. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
2. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
3. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
4. Attach the bulb holder.
5. Attach trunk lid trim.
Convertible: two-stage brake light in
the trunk lid
H21W bulb, 21 watts
1. Take the warning triangle out of its holder,
refer to page 239. Unscrew the holder using
the screwdriver from the onboard vehicle
tool kit.
2. Pry out the plastic plugs in the trim of the
trunk lid using a screwdriver and remove the
trim.
3. Release the bulb holder, see arrow, and
remove.
4. Apply gentle pressure to the bulb while
turning it to the left for removal and replace-
ment.
5. Attach the bulb holder.
6. Reattach the trim of the trunk lid and the
holder for the warning triangle.
Changing wheels
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tires as
standard. This eliminates the need to change a
wheel immediately in the event of a puncture.
For information on continuing to drive with a
damaged tire, refer to Indication of a flat tire on
page 93.
The symbol identifying run-flat tires is a circle
with the letters RSC on the sidewall, refer to
Run-flat tires, page 220.
When mounting new tires or changing over
from summer to winter tires and vice versa,
mount run-flat tires for your own safety. In the
event of a flat, no spare wheel is available. Your
BMW center will be glad to advise you. Refer
also to New wheels and tires, page 220.
The tools for changing wheels are avail-
able as optional accessories from your
BMW center.<
Jack mounting points
The jacking points are at the positions shown in
the illustration.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
237
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Vehicle battery
Battery care
The battery is 100% maintenance-free, the
electrolyte will last for the life of the battery
when the vehicle is operated in a temperate cli-
mate. Your BMW center will be glad to advise in
all matters concerning the battery.
Battery replacing
Only use vehicle batteries that have been
approved for your vehicle by the manu-
facturer; otherwise, the vehicle could be dam-
aged and systems or functions may not be fully
available.<
After a battery replacement, have the battery
registered on the vehicle by your service center
to ensure that all comfort functions are fully
available.
Charging the battery
Only charge the battery in the vehicle via the
terminals in the engine compartment with the
engine off. Connections, refer to Jump-starting
on page 239.
Disposal
Have old batteries disposed of by your
BMW center or bring them to a recycling
center. Maintain the battery in an upright posi-
tion for transport and storage. Always secure
the battery against tipping over during trans-
port.<
Power failure
After a temporary power loss, the functioning of
some equipment may be limited and require
reinitialization. Individual settings may likewise
have been lost and will have to be programmed:
> Time and date
These values must be updated, refer to
page 83.
> Radio
In some cases, stations may have to be
stored again, refer to page 157.
> Navigation system
Operability must be waited for, refer to
page 134.
> Glass roof
It may happen that the roof can only be
raised. The system must be initialized.
Please contact your BMW center.
> Seat and mirror memory
The positions must be stored again, refer to
page 48.
> Inside rearview mirror with digital compass
The system must be calibrated, refer to
page 114.
> Active steering
The system automatically initializes itself
briefly during a trip. The system is deacti-
vated during this time, refer to page 96.
> xDrive
The system automatically initializes itself
during a trip. Indicator lamps light up during
this time. If the lamps do not go out during
the current trip, have the system checked.
Fuses
Never attempt to repair a blown fuse and
do not replace a defective fuse with a sub-
stitute of another color or amperage rating; oth-
erwise, this could lead to a circuit overload, ulti-
mately resulting in a fire in the vehicle.<
Open the cover in the glove compartment
and remove it.
Plastic tweezers are located on the
distributor box.
See the rear of the cover for information
on fuse assignment.
Spare fuses are available from your
BMW center.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
238
Giving and receiving assistance
Emergency Request*
Conditions for an Emergency Request:
> Full preparation package mobile phone: this
equipment makes it possible to send an
Emergency Request even if no mobile
phone is paired with the vehicle.
> BMW Assist is activated. Activating
BMW Assist, refer to page 200.
> Radio readiness is on.
> The BMW Assist system is logged on to a
mobile phone network.
> The Emergency Request system is opera-
ble.
Once your service contract for BMW Assist
expires, the BMW Assist system can be deacti-
vated by a BMW center without you having to
visit a workshop. Once the BMW Assist system
has been deactivated, Emergency Requests
are not possible. The BMW Assist system can
be reactivated by a BMW center after a new
contract has been signed.
Sending an Emergency Request
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open.
2. Press the SOS button until the LED in the
button lights up.
As soon as the voice connection to the BMW
Assist Response Center has been established,
the LED flashes.
Once the BMW Assist Response Center has
received your Emergency Request, the
BMW Assist Response Center contacts you
and takes further steps to help you. Even if you
are unable to respond, the BMW Assist
Response Center will be able to initiate further
steps to assist you under certain conditions.
If the circumstances allow this, remain in the
vehicle until the connection has been estab-
lished. You will then be able to provide a
detailed description of the situation.
Data for determining the necessary rescue
measures are transmitted to the BMW Assist
Response Center, e.g. the current position of
your vehicle, if it can be determined.
If the LED is flashing but the BMW Assist
Response Center cannot be heard over the
hands-free system, it is possible that the
hands-free system is malfunctioning. You may
still be heard by the BMW Assist Response
Center, however.
Under certain conditions, an Emergency
Request is sent automatically immediately after
a severe accident. This Automatic Collision
Notification is not affected by the button being
pressed.
For technical reasons, the Emergency
Request service cannot be guaranteed
for the most unfavorable conditions.<
Roadside Assistance
BMW Roadside Assistance is available by
phone around the clock in many countries.
You can obtain support there in the event of
abreakdown.
Phone numbers for BMW Roadside Assistance
can be found in the Contact brochure.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
239
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
First aid pouch*
Some of the articles contained in the first aid
pouch have a limited service life. Therefore,
check the expiration dates of the contents reg-
ularly and replace any items in good time, if nec-
essary.
Coupe
The first aid pouch is located on the right-hand
side of the cargo area in a storage area.
Convertible
The first aid pouch is located in a compartment
under the front passenger seat.
To open: press the button and fold the cover
down.
To close: fold the cover back up and press it into
the catch.
Warning triangle*
Coupe
The warning triangle is located on the left-hand
side of the cargo area. Press the tab to take it
out.
Convertible
The warning triangle is located in a holder in the
trunk lid. Press the tabs to take it out.
Jump-starting
If the car's own battery is flat, your BMW's
engine can be started by connecting two
jumper cables to another vehicle's battery.
You can also use the same method to help start
another vehicle. Only use jumper cables with
fully-insulated clamp handles.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Carefully adhere to the follow-
ing sequence, both to prevent damage to one or
both vehicles, and to guard against possible
personal injuries.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
240
Preparation
1. Check whether the battery of the other
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts and
approximately the same capacitance in Ah.
This information can be found on the bat-
tery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting vehi-
cle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
There must not be any contact between
the bodies of the two vehicles; otherwise,
there is a danger of shorting.<
Connecting jumper cables
Connect the jumper cables in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Your BMW has a jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment which acts as the bat-
tery's positive terminal, refer also to the Engine
compartment overview on page 223. The cap is
marked with +.
1. Pull the cap of the BMW jump-starting con-
nection up to remove.
2. Attach one terminal clamp of the plus/+
jumper cable to the positive terminal of the
battery or a starting-aid terminal of the vehi-
cle providing assistance.
3. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
plus/+ jumper cable to the positive terminal
of the battery or a starting-aid terminal of
the vehicle to be started.
4. Attach one terminal clamp of the minus/–
jumper cable to the negative terminal of the
battery or to an engine or body ground of
the assisting vehicle.
Your BMW has a special nut as body ground
or negative pole.
5. Attach the second terminal clamp of the
minus/– jumper cable to the negative termi-
nal of the battery or to the engine or body
ground of the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine
1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at slightly
increased idle speed.
2. Start the engine on the other vehicle in the
usual way.
If the first start attempt is not successful,
wait a few minutes before another attempt
in order to allow the discharged battery to
recharge.
3. Let the engines run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables by reversing
the above connecting sequence.
If necessary, have the battery checked and
recharged.
Never use spray fluids to start the
engine.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
241
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
Tow-starting, towing away
Observe the applicable laws and
regulations for tow-starting and towing
vehicles.<
Do not transport any passengers other
than the driver in a vehicle that is being
towed.<
Using a tow fitting
The screw-in tow fitting must always be carried
in the car. It can be screwed in at the front or
rear of the BMW.
Coupe: it is stored in the onboard vehicle tool kit
underneath the cover on the right-hand side of
the cargo area, refer to page 233.
Convertible: it is stored in the onboard vehicle
tool kit underneath the cargo area floor, refer to
page 233.
Use only the tow fitting provided with the
vehicle and screw it all the way in. Use the
tow fitting for towing on paved roads only. Avoid
lateral loading of the tow fitting, e.g. do not lift
the vehicle by the tow fitting. Otherwise, the
tow fitting and the vehicle could be damaged.<
Access to screw thread
Release the cover panel in the bumper:
Press on the upper part of the cover panel.
Front
Rear
Being towed
Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
refer to page 55; otherwise, the low-beam
headlamps, tail lamps, turn signal indicators and
windshield wipers may be unavailable.
Power steering assistance is not available when
the engine is not running. Thus, braking and
steering will require increased effort. Active
steering is not active and it will be necessary to
turn the steering wheel further.<
Manual transmission
Gearshift lever in neutral position.
Automatic transmission
Selector lever in position N.
Changing selector lever positions, refer to
page 58.
Do not exceed a towing speed of 45 mph
or 70 km/h and a towing distance of
90 miles/150 km; otherwise, the automatic
transmission may be damaged.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Giving and receiving assistance
242
Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch
Make sure that the parking lock P is not
engaged; otherwise, the rear wheels are
immobilized.
When using the car wash function, refer to
page 230, make sure that after approx.
30 minutes, the parking lock P is automatically
engaged and thus immobilizes the rear wheels.
In the event of an electrical malfunction or if the
vehicle must be towed for more than approx.
20 minutes, unlock the parking lock manually,
refer to page 63.<
When towing, do not exceed a maximum
speed of 30 mph or 50 km/h and a maxi-
mum distance traveled of 30 miles/50 km; oth-
erwise, the transmission may be damaged.<
BMW recommends transporting the vehicle on
a tow truck with a flatbed or towing with the rear
axle raised.
Towing methods
Do not lift the vehicle by a tow fitting or
body and chassis parts; otherwise, dam-
age may result.<
With a tow bar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
than the towed vehicle; otherwise, it may
be impossible to maintain control.<
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles. Should it prove impossi-
ble to avoid mounting the tow bar at an angle,
please observe the following:
> Clearance and maneuvering capability will
be sharply limited during cornering.
> The tow bar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Attach the tow bar to the tow fittings only,
as attaching it to other parts of the vehicle
could result in damage.<
With a tow rope
When starting off in the towing vehicle, make
sure that the tow rope is taut.
To avoid jerking and the associated
stresses on vehicle components when
towing, always use nylon ropes or nylon straps.
Attach the tow rope to the tow fittings only, as
attaching it to other parts of the vehicle could
result in damage.<
With a tow truck: vehicle without xDrive
Manual and automatic transmission:
Sports automatic transmission with
double clutch:
Have the BMW transported with a tow truck
with a so-called lift bar, or on a flatbed.
Do not tow the vehicle with just the rear axle
raised as this may cause the steering to turn.
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Mobility
243
Reference At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainment
With a tow truck: vehicle with xDrive
Do not tow a BMW with xDrive with just
the front or rear axle raised; otherwise, the
wheels could lock up and the transfer case
could be damaged.<
Have the BMW transported on a flatbed surface
only.
Tow-starting
Avoid tow-starting the vehicle whenever possi-
ble; instead, jump-start the engine, refer to
page 239Vehicles with a catalytic converter
should only be tow-started when the engine is
cold; vehicles with an automatic transmission or
Sports automatic transmission with double
clutch cannot be tow-started at all.
1. Switch on hazard warning flashers, comply
with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 55.
3. Shift into 3rd gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the clutch
depressed and slowly release the clutch.
After the engine starts, immediately
depress the clutch completely again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the tow
bar or rope and switch off the hazard warn-
ing flashers.
6. Have the vehicle checked.
With xDrive: do not activate Hill Descent
Control HDC when the vehicle is being
tow-started, page 91.<
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
This chapter contains technical data,
short commands for the voice activation
system and an index that will help
you find information most quickly.
Reference
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technical data
246
Technical data
Engine data
Coupe
Convertible
328i/xDrive 335i/xDrive 335is
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300 335
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 5,900
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407 332/450
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400-5,000 1,500
328i 335i 335is
Displacement cu in/cmμ 182.8/2,996 181.8/2,979 181.8/2,979
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Maximum power output hp 230 300 335
at engine speed rpm 6,500 5,800 5,900
Maximum torque lb ft/Nm 200/270 300/407 332/450
at engine speed rpm 2,750 1,400-5,000 1,500
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
247
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Dimensions
Coupe
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m, with xDrive: 38.7 ft/11.8 m.
335i, 335i xDrive, 335is: height approx. 54.1 in/1,375 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technical data
248
Convertible
All dimensions given in inches/mm.
Smallest turning circle dia.: 36.1 ft/11.0 m.
335is height approx. 54.0 in/1,370 mm
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
249
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Weights
Coupe
Convertible
328i 328i
xDrive
335i 335i
xDrive
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,288/1,945 4,508/2,045 4,486/2,035 4,663/2,115
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,354/1,975 4,552/2,065 4,508/2,045 4,685/2,125
Load lbs/kg 882/400 882/400 882/400 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,061/935 2,227/1,010 2,172/985 2,326/1,055
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,425/1,100 2,447/1,110 2,469/1,120 2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75 165/75 165/75 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
15.5/440 15.5/440 15.2/430 15.2/430
335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,497/2,040
> Sports automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs/kg 4,519/2,050
Load lbs/kg 882/400
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,183/990
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,513/1,140
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg 165/75
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
15.2/430
328i 335i 335is
Approved gross weight
> with manual transmission lbs/kg 4,707/2,135 4,817/2,185 4,839/2,195
> with automatic transmission lbs/kg 4,773/2,165 4,839/2,195 –
> Sports automatic transmis-
sion with double clutch
lbs/kg – – 4,872/2,210
Load lbs/kg 838/380 838/380 838/380
Approved front axle load lbs/kg 2,138/970 2,205/1,000 2,227/1,010
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Technical data
250
Capacities
Approved rear axle load lbs/kg 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200 2,646/1,200
Approved roof load capacity lbs/kg – – –
Cargo area capacity cu ft/
liters
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
7.4-12.4/
210-350
328i 335i 335is
Notes
Fuel tank US gal/liters approx. 16.1/61 Fuel grade: page 207
including reserve of US gal/liters approx. 2.1/8.0
Window washer system For more details: page 66
including headlamp washers US qt/liters approx. 6.3/6.0
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
251
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Short commands for the voice activation
system
With short commands you can carry out certain
functions directly, regardless of which menu
item is selected. Here are the important short
commands for the voice activation system.
Useful short commands
CD/Multimedia
CD/DVD drive
*
Function Command
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the contacts
* {Contacts}
Displaying the phone book
* {Phonebook}
Opening services
* {Assist}
Opening BMW Assist
* {B M W Assist}
Opening the home address
* {Home address}
Opening destination entry
* {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance
* {Guidance}
Function Command
Playing back a CD {C D on}
Selecting a CD {Select C D}
Selecting a CD and track {C D … track …} e.g. CD 3 track 5
Selecting a track {C D track …} e.g. track 5
Opening the CD and Multimedia menu {C D and multimedia}
CD and DVD
* {C D}
Displaying entertainment details on the split
screen
*
{Entertainment details}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
252
Music collection
External devices
Tone control
Radio
FM
AM
Satellite radio
Function Command
Calling up the current playback {Current playback}
Opening a music collection {Music collection}
Playing back a music collection {Music collection on}
Searching for music; opening the menu {Music search}
Playing back the most frequently played tracks {Top fifty}
Function Command
Opening external devices {External devices}
Function Command
Opening the tone control {Tone}
Function Command
Calling up the radio {Radio}
Calling up an FM station {F M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Selecting the frequency range {Select frequency}
Calling up a station {Select station} e.g. W-PLJ
Function Command
Calling up an AM station {A M}
Opening manual search {Manual}
Function Command
Calling up the satellite radio {Satellite radio}
Switching on the satellite radio {Satellite radio on}
Selecting a satellite radio channel {Select satellite radio} e.g. channel 2
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
253
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Presets
Telephone
Navigation
General information
Function Command
Opening the stored stations {Presets}
Choosing a stored station {Select preset}
Selecting a stored station {Preset …} e.g. stored station 2
Function Command
Opening the Telephone menu {Telephone}
Displaying the phone book {Phonebook}
Redialing {Redial}
Displaying accepted calls {Received calls}
Dialing a phone number {Dial number}
Displaying the list of messages {Messages}
Displaying Bluetooth devices {Bluetooth}
Function Command
Navigation menu {Navigation}
Opening destination entry {Enter address}
Entering an address {Enter address}
Opening destination guidance {Guidance}
Starting destination guidance {Start guidance}
Ending destination guidance {Stop guidance}
Opening the home address {Home address}
Opening the route criteria {Route preference}
Opening the route {Route information}
Switching on the voice instructions {Switch on voice instructions}
Repeating a voice instruction {Repeat voice instructions}
Switching off the voice instructions {Switch off voice instructions}
Displaying the address book {Address book}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
254
Map
Split screen* settings
Destination guidance with intermediate destinations
Displaying the last destinations {Last destinations}
Opening the traffic bulletins {Traffic Info}
Special destinations {Points of interest}
Function Command
Function Command
Displaying the map {Map}
Map facing north {Map facing north}
Map in the direction of travel {Map in direction of travel}
Perspective map {Map perspective view}
Automatic map scaling
* {Map with automatic scaling}
Changing the scale {Map scale}
Function Command
Split screen {Switch on splitscreen}
Switching off the split screen {Turn off split screen}
Adapting the split screen {Split screen content}
Split screen, current position {Split screen current position}
Split screen, map facing north {Split screen map facing north}
Split screen, direction of travel {Split screen map in direction of travel}
Split screen, perspective {Split screen perspective}
Expanded intersection zoom on the split screen {Splitscreen Exit ramp view}
Split screen scale ... meters
* {Split screen scale … meters} e.g. split screen
scale of 100 meters
Split screen scale ... kilometers
* {Split screen scale … kilometers} e.g. split
screen scale of 5 kilometers
Split screen, highlighting traffic bulletins {Split screen, Traffic conditions}
Split screen, computer {Split screen on board info}
Split screen, trip computer {Splitscreen trip computer}
Automatically scaling the split screen {Split screen automatic scaling}
Function Command
Entering a new destination {Enter address}
Trip list {Stored trips}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
255
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Contacts
BMW Assist
Vehicle information
Function Command
Opening the contacts {Contacts}
My contacts {My contacts}
New contact {New contact}
Function Command
Opening BMW Assist* {B M W Assist}
Opening BMW Search
* {B M W Search}
Function Command
Opening the computer {Onboard info}
Opening the trip computer {Trip computer}
Opening the vehicle information {Vehicle info}
Opening the vehicle status {Vehicle status}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Short commands for the voice activation system
256
Settings
Vehicle
Equipment
Function Command
Opening the main menu {Main menu}
Opening the settings {Settings}
Opening the options {Options}
Settings on the Control Display {Control display}
Opening the time and date settings {Time and date}
Opening the language and unit settings {Language and units}
Opening the speed limit settings {Speed}
Opening the light settings {Lighting}
Opening the door lock settings {Door locks}
Function Command
Opening the air conditioning settings {Climate}
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
258
Everything from A to Z
Index
A
ABS Antilock Brake
System 89
ACC, refer to Active cruise
control 68
Acceleration assistant, refer to
Launch Control 64
Accident, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request 238
Activated-charcoal filter for
automatic climate
control 109
Active Cruise Control
– indicator lamp 71
– malfunction 72
– selecting distance 70
– sensor 72
Active cruise control 68
Active steering 96
Adaptive brake light
– Brake Force Display 97
Adaptive light control 102
Additives
– coolant 226
Address, entering 135, 141
Address for navigation
– entering 135
Adjusting temperature inside
the car, refer to Automatic
climate control 107
Adjusting the thigh support 43
Airbags 98
– indicator/warning lamp 99
– sitting safely 42
Air conditioning mode
– automatic climate
control 107
– ventilation 109
Air distribution
– automatic 107
Airing, refer to Ventilation 109
Air pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 208
Air recirculation, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 108
Air supply
– automatic climate
control 107
– ventilation 109
Air vents 106
Air volume 108
AKI, refer to Fuel
specifications 207
Alarm system 32
– avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
– interior motion sensor 33
– switching off an alarm 32
– tilt alarm sensor 33
Albums of music
collection 174
ALL program 108
All-season tires, refer to
Winter tires 221
All-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90
AM, waveband 157
Ambient air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 108
Antenna for mobile phone 184
Antifreeze
– coolant 226
– washer fluid 66
Antilock Brake System
ABS 89
Anti-theft alarm system, refer
to Alarm system 32
Anti-theft system 27
Approved axle loads, refer to
Weights 249
Approved gross vehicle
weight, refer to Weights 249
Armrest, refer to Center
armrest 115
Arrival time, refer to
Computer 77
Ashtray 117
Assist systems, refer to
Driving stability control 89
AUC Automatic recirculated-
air control 108
Audible instructions, refer to
Spoken instructions 146
Audio 154
– controls 154
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 154
– volume 154
Audio device, external 115
Automatic
– air distribution 107
– air volume 107
– cruise control 66, 68
– headlamp control 101
Automatic car washes 229
Automatic climate control 106
Automatic curb monitor 50
Automatic high beams and
low beams, refer to High-
beam assistant 103
Automatic recirculated-air
control AUC 108
Automatic Service
Request 202
Automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– interlock 58
– overriding selector lever
lock 59
– shiftlock, refer to Changing
selector lever position 58
– sport program 59
– towing
241
– tow-starting 241
AUTO program for automatic
climate control 107
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
259
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
AUX-IN
– port 115
AUX-IN port 177
Available services 202
Average fuel consumption 77
– setting the units 80
Average speed 77
Avoid highways in
navigation 144
Avoiding unintentional
alarms 33
Axle loads, refer to
Weights 249
B
Backrest contour, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Backrests, refer to Seat
adjustment 43
Backrest width adjustment 44
Back seats
– refer to Rear seats 46
Bag holder 119
Band-aids, refer to First aid
pouch 239
Bar, refer to Towing
methods 242
Base plate for telephone or
mobile phone
– refer to Snap-in adapter 195
– refer to Snap-in adapter in
the center armrest storage
compartment 115
Bass, tone setting 154
Battery 237
– charging 237
– disposal 35, 237
– jump-starting 239
– remote control 26
– replacing 237
– temporary power failure 237
Battery for mobile phone 195
Battery renewal
– remote control 35
– remote control for vehicle 35
Being towed 241
Belt hand-over 49
– pinch protection system 50
Belts, refer to Safety belts 49
Belt tensioner, refer to Safety
belts 49
Beverage holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Black ice, refer to Outside
temperature warning 75
Blinds, refer to Roller sun
blinds 114
Blower, refer to Air
volume 108
Bluetooth, activating/
deactivating 187
BMW
– car shampoo 232
BMW Assist 198
BMW Assist,
activating 200, 202
BMW Homepage 4
BMW Maintenance
System 227
BMW Search 200
BMW webpage 4
Bottle holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Brake Assist, refer to Dynamic
Brake Control DBC 89
Brake fluid, refer to Service
requirements 80
Brake Force Display 97
Brake lamps
– Brake Force Display 97
Brake pads 126
– breaking in 126
Brake rotors 128
– brakes 126
– breaking in 126
Brakes
– ABS 89
– BMW Maintenance
System 227
– Brake Force Display 97
– breaking in 126
– parking brake 57
– service requirements 80
Brakes, refer to Braking
safely 128
Brake system 126
– BMW Maintenance
System 227
– breaking in 126
– disc brakes 128
Breakdown services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 238
Breaking in the clutch 126
Breaking in the differential,
refer to Engine and
differential 126
Break-in period 126
Brightness of the Control
Display 87
Bulb changing, refer to Lamps
and bulbs 233
Button for starting the engine,
refer to Start/stop button 55
Buttons on the steering
wheel 11
C
California Proposition 65
warning 6
Call
– accepting 188
– ending 188
– rejecting 188
Calling, refer to Phone
numbers, dialing 188
Calling, refer to Telephone
owner's manual
Can holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Capacities 250
Capacity of the cargo area 249
Car battery, refer to Vehicle
battery 237
Car care, refer to Care 229
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
260
Care 229
– automatic car washes 229
– care products 229
– carpets 232
– CD/DVD drives 232
– chrome parts 231
– displays 232
– exterior 229
– fine wood parts 232
– headlamps 230
– high-pressure washer 230
– interior 231
– leather 231
– light-alloy wheels 231
– paintwork 230
– plastic parts 232
– retractable hardtop 230
– rubber seals 231
– safety belts 232
– sensors and cameras 232
– upholstery and cloth
trim 231
– washing the car
manually 230
– windows 230
Cargo, securing 130
Cargo area
– capacity 249
– Comfort Access 34
– folding up the floor
panel 120
– lamp, refer to Interior
lamps 105
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
Cargo loading 129
– securing cargo 130
– stowing cargo 130
– vehicle 129
Car jack
– jacking points 236
Car key, refer to Integrated
key/remote control 26
Car phone
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 115
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Car phone, refer to
Telephone 184
Car radio, refer to Radio 157
Car shampoo 232
Catalytic converter, refer to
Hot exhaust system 127
CD, audio playback 165
CD changer 165, 169
– controls 154
– fast forward/reverse 167
– filling or emptying the
magazine 170
– random play sequence 166
– selecting a track 165
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 154
– volume 154
CD player 165
– controls 154
– fast forward/reverse 167
– random play sequence 166
– selecting a track 165
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 154
– volume 154
Center armrest 115
Center brake lamp
– replacing bulb 235
Center console, refer to
Around the center
console 14
Central locking
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Central locking system 27
– Comfort Access 33
– hotel function 31
– setting unlocking
characteristics 28
Changes, technical, refer to
For your own safety 5
Changing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 233
Changing gears 62
Changing the language on the
Control Display 87
Changing the measurement
units on the Control
Display 80
Changing wheels 236
Chassis number, refer to
Engine compartment 223
Check Control 84
Child restraint fixing system
LATCH 53
Child restraint systems 52
Child seats, refer to
Transporting children
safely 52
Chrome parts 232
Chrome polish 232
Cigarette lighter, refer to
Lighter 117
Cleaning headlamps 66
– washer fluid 66
Cleaning your BMW, refer to
Care 229
Climate control
– automatic air
distribution
107
Clock 75
– 12h/24h mode 83
– setting the time and date 83
– setting time 83
Closing
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Clothes hooks 116
Cockpit 10
Cold start, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Comfort Access 33
– replacing the battery 35
Comfort access, refer to
Comfort Access 33
Comfort area, refer to Around
the center console 14
Compartment for remote
control, refer to Ignition
lock 55
Compass 113
Computer 76
– displays on Control
Display 77
Computer, refer to iDrive 16
Concierge service 199
Condensation, refer to When
the vehicle is parked 128
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
261
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Condition Based Service
CBS 227
Configuring settings, refer to
Personal Profile 26
Confirmation signals for
locking/unlocking the
vehicle 29
Congestion
– refer to Route, bypassing
sections 145
Connecting vacuum cleaner,
refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 118
Consumption, refer to
Average fuel
consumption 77
Contacts
– creating 196
Control Center, refer to
iDrive 16
Control Display, refer to
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 87
– switching on/off 19
Controller, refer to iDrive 16
Controls and displays 10
Control unit, refer to iDrive 16
Convenient loading in
Convertible 28
Convenient operation
– glass roof 28
– glass roof with Comfort
Access 34
– retractable hardtop 28
– windows 28
– windows with Comfort
Access 34
Convertible
– bag holder 119
– convenient loading 28
– enlarging cargo area 119
– folding down rear
backrest 119
– retractable hardtop 38
– rollover protection
system 100
– securing cargo 130
– stowing cargo 130
Coolant 226
– checking level 226
Coolant temperature 76
Cooling, maximum 107
Cooling fluid, refer to
Coolant 226
Cooling system, refer to
Coolant 226
Copyright 2
Corner-illuminating lamps
– replacing bulbs 234
Corner-illuminating lamps,
refer to Adaptive light
control 102
Cornering lamps, refer to
Adaptive light control 102
Correct tires 220
Country codes DVD 167
Courtesy lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 105
Criteria for route 144
Cross-hairs in navigation 140
Cruise control 66
– active 68
– malfunction 68
Cruise control, refer to Active
cruise control 68
Cruising range 77
Cupholders 116
Curb weight, refer to
Weights 249
Current playback
– external devices 180
– of music collection 174
Customer Relations 201
D
Dashboard, refer to
Cockpit 10
Dashboard, refer to
instrument cluster 12
Dashboard lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 105
Data, technical 246
– capacities 250
– dimensions 247
– engine 246
– weights 249
Data memory 228
Data transfer 202
Date
– date format 84
– setting 84
Daytime running lights 102
– replacing bulbs 234
DBC Dynamic Brake
Control 89
Deactivating front passenger
airbags 98
Deadlocking, refer to
Locking 28
Defect
– door lock 30
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 38
Destination, entering by town/
city name 135
Destination address
– entering 135, 141
Destination entry via BMW
Assist 140
Destination for navigation
– entering by voice 141
– entering via map 140
– entry 135
– home address 138
– manual entry 135
Destination guidance 144
– bypassing a route
section 145
– changing specified
route 144
– continuing 144
– starting 144
– voice instructions 146
– volume of voice
instructions 146
Digital clock 75
Digital compass 113
Digital radio, refer to HD
Radio 158
Dimensions 247
Directional indicators, refer to
Turn signals 64
Direction instructions, refer to
Voice instructions 146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
262
Directory for navigation, refer
to Address book 137
Displacement, refer to Engine
data 246
Display, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Display lighting, refer to
Instrument lighting 105
Displays
– on the Control Display 16
Displays, refer to Instrument
cluster 12
Displays and controls 10
Disposal
– coolant 226
– remote control battery 35
– vehicle battery 237
Distance remaining to service,
refer to Service
requirements 80
Distance warning, refer to
Park Distance Control
PDC 88
Door key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 26
Door lock 29
Doors, emergency
operation 30
DOT Quality Grades 218
Draft-free ventilation 109
Drinks holders, refer to
Cupholders 116
Drive mode 61
Drive-off assistance, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
Drive-off assistant 92
Driving dynamics control 62
Driving lamps, refer to Parking
lamps/low beams 101
Driving notes 126
Driving off on hills, refer to
Drive-off assistant 92
Driving stability control
systems 89
Driving through water 128
Driving tips, refer to Driving
notes 126
Dry air, refer to Cooling
function 108
DSC Dynamic Stability
Control 89
DTC Dynamic Traction
Control 90
– indicator/warning lamp 90
DVD
– country codes 167
– settings 168
– video playback 167
DVD menu 168
DVD player, refer to CD
player 165
DVD video 167
Dynamic Brake Control
DBC 89
Dynamic destination
guidance 145
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
– indicator/warning lamp 90
Dynamic Traction Control
DTC
– indicator/warning lamp 90
E
EBV Electronic brake-force
distribution 89
Eject button, refer to Buttons
on the CD/DVD player 154
Electrical defect
– 7-gear Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch 63
Electrical malfunction
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 38
Electric seat adjustment 44
Electric steering wheel lock
– with Comfort Access 34
Electronic brake-force
distribution EBV 89
Electronic oil level check 223
Electronic Stability Program
ESP, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 89
Emergency actuation,
automatic transmission,
refer to Overriding selector
lever lock 59
Emergency operation
– fuel filler flap, manual
release 206
Emergency operation, refer to
Closing manually
– glass roof 38
Emergency operation, refer to
Manual operation
– door lock 30
Emergency release
– trunk lid from inside 32
Emergency Request 238
Emergency services, refer to
Roadside Assistance 238
Energy, saving
– saving fuel 126
Engine
– breaking in 126
– data 246
– overheated, refer to Coolant
temperature 76
– speed 246
– starting 56
– starting, Comfort Access 33
– switching off 56
Engine compartment 223
Engine coolant, refer to
Coolant 226
Engine oil
– adding 225
– alternative oil types 225
– BMW Maintenance
System 227
– capacity 250
– checking level 223
– intervals between changes,
refer to Service
requirements 80
Engine output, refer to Engine
data 246
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
263
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Engine speed, refer to Engine
data 246
Engine starting, refer to
Starting the engine 56
Entering special destinations
by name 140
Entering the postal code for
navigation 136
Entry lamps, refer to Interior
lamps 105
Entry map for destination 140
Equalizer, tone setting 155
Error messages, refer to
Check Control 84
ESP Electronic Stability
Program, refer to Dynamic
Stability Control DSC 89
Exhaust system, refer to Hot
exhaust system 127
Extended connectivity of the
music player in the mobile
phone 178
Exterior mirrors 50
– adjusting 50
– automatic dimming
feature 51
– automatic heating 50
– folding in and out 50
External audio device 115
External devices
– random sequence 180
Eyes
– for tow-starting and towing
away 241
– for tying down loads 130
F
Failure messages, refer to
Check Control 84
Failure of an electrical
consumer 237
False alarm
– avoiding unintentional
alarm 33
– switching off an alarm 32
Fastening safety belts, refer to
Safety belts 49
Fastest route for
navigation 144
Fast forward
– CD changer 167
– CD player 167
Filter
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 109
First aid pouch 239
Fixture for remote control,
refer to Ignition lock 55
Flash when locking/
unlocking 29
Flat tire
– run-flat tires 220
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
Flat Tire Monitor FTM 92
– indicating a flat tire 93
– indicator/warning lamp 93
– initializing the system 93
– snow chains 92, 221
– system limits 92
Flat tires, refer to Tire
condition 219
Fluid reservoir, refer to
Washer fluid reservoir 66
FM, waveband 157
Fog lamps 104
– indicator lamp 13, 104
Folding up the floor panel 120
Footbrake, refer to Braking
safely 128
Footwell lamps, refer to
Interior lamps 105
For your own safety 5
Four-wheel drive, refer to
xDrive 90
Free memory capacity, music
collection 175
Front airbags 98
FTM, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92
Fuel 207
– average consumption 77
– gauge 76
– high-quality brands 207
– quality 207
– specifications
207
– tank contents, refer to
Capacities 250
Fuel clock, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Fuel consumption indicator
– average fuel
consumption 77
Fuel display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Fuel filler flap 206
– releasing in the event of
electrical malfunction 206
Fuses 237
G
Garage door opener, refer to
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Gasoline
– refer to Average
consumption 77
Gasoline, refer to Required
fuel 207
Gasoline display, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Gas station
recommendations 146
Gear indicator, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 58
Gear indicator, refer to
Displays in the instrument
cluster 60
Gearshift lever 60
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– manual transmission 57
Gearshifts
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– manual transmission 57
General driving notes 127
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
264
Glass roof, electric 37
– closing after electrical
malfunction 38
– convenient operation 28, 30
– initializing 38
– opening, closing 37
– operation with Comfort
Access 34
– pinch protection system 37
– power failure 38
– raising 37
– remote control 28
Glove compartment 114
GPS navigation, refer to
Navigation system 134
Grills 106
Gross vehicle weight, refer to
Weights 249
H
Handbrake, refer to Parking
brake 57
Hands-free system 14
Hazard warning flashers 14
HDC Hill Descent Control 91
HD Radio 158
Head airbags 98
Headlamp control,
automatic 101
Headlamp flasher 64
– indicator lamp 11, 13
Head restraints 45
– rear, removing 46
– sitting safely 42
Heated
– mirrors 50
– rear window 108
– seats 47
– steering wheel 51
Heating
– mirrors 50
– rear window 108
– seats 47
– steering wheel 51
Heating and ventilation, refer
to Climate 106
Heavy loads, refer to Stowing
cargo 130
Height, refer to
Dimensions 247
Height adjustment
– seats 43
– steering wheel 51
High-beam assistant 103
High beams 103
– headlamp flasher 103
– indicator lamp 13
High beams and low beams,
automatic, refer to High-
beam assistant 103
High-pressure
washer 229, 230
High water, refer to Driving
through water 128
Highways, refer to Route
criteria 144
Hill Descent Control HDC 91
Hills 128
Holders for cups 116
Homepage BMW 4
Hood 222
Hooks for shopping bags 120
Horn 10, 11
Hotel function, refer to
Locking or unlocking
separately
31
Hot exhaust system 127
Hydraulic brake assist, refer to
Dynamic Brake Control 89
Hydroplaning 127
I
IBOC, refer to HD Radio 158
Ice warning, refer to Outside
temperature warning 75
Identification marks
– run-flat tires 220
– tire coding 218
iDrive 16
– adjusting brightness 87
– changing date and time 83
– changing language 87
– changing settings 87
– changing units of measure
and display format 80
– controls 16
– menu guidance 17
– operating principle 16
– overview 16
– start menu 17
– status information 19
iDrive operating principle 16
Ignition 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Ignition key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 26
Ignition key position 1, refer to
Radio readiness 55
Ignition key position 2, refer to
Ignition on 55
Ignition lock 55
Imprint 2
Indicator and warning
lamps 13
– Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 95
Inflation pressure, refer to Tire
inflation pressure 208
Inflation pressure monitoring,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 94
Initializing
– after power failure 237
– compass, refer to
Calibrating 114
– Flat Tire Monitor FTM 93
– glass roof 38
– radio, refer to Station,
storing 157
– refer to Setting the time and
date 83
Installation location
– telephone 115
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
265
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Instructions for navigation
system, refer to Voice
instructions 146
Instrument cluster 12
Instrument combination, refer
to Instrument cluster 12
Instrument lighting 105
Instrument panel, refer to
Cockpit 10
Integrated key 26
Integrated universal remote
control 111
Interactive map 141
Interior lamps 105
– remote control 28
Interior motion sensor 33
Interior rearview mirror 51
– automatic dimming
feature 51
– compass 113
Interlock, refer to Disengaging
the remote control 58
Intermittent mode of the
wipers 65
Intersection, entering,
navigation 136
iPod, connecting, refer to
AUX-IN port 177
iPod, connecting, refer to USB
audio interface 178
J
Jacking points 236
Joystick, refer to iDrive 16
Jumpering, refer to Jump-
starting 239
Jump-starting 239
K
Key, refer to Integrated key/
remote control 26
Keyless go, refer to Comfort
Access 33
Keyless opening and closing,
refer to Comfort Access 33
Key Memory, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Kickdown 58
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
Knock control 207
L
Lamps
– automatic headlamp
control 101
– parking lamps/low
beams 101
Lamps and bulbs, replacing
bulbs 233
Lap-and-shoulder belt, refer
to Safety belts 49
Lashing eyes, refer to
Securing cargo 130
Last destinations 138
LATCH child restraint fixing
system 53
Launch Control 64
Leather care 231
LED Light-emitting
diodes 233
Length, refer to
Dimensions 247
License plate lamp, replacing
bulb 235
Light
– high-beam assistant 103
Light-alloy wheels 231
Light-emitting diodes
LED 233
Lighter 117
– connecting electrical
appliances 118
Lighting
– instruments 105
– lamps and bulbs 233
– vehicle, refer to Lamps 101
Light switch 101
Limit, refer to Speed limit 86
Load 129
Load securing equipment,
refer to Securing cargo 130
Lock buttons, doors, refer to
Locking 31
Locking
– adjusting confirmation
signal 29
– from inside 31
– from outside 28
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 33
Locking and unlocking doors
– confirmation signals 29
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Low beam control, refer to
High-beam assistant 103
Low-beam headlamps 101
– automatic 101
Lower back support, refer to
Lumbar support 44
Luggage rack, refer to Roof-
mounted luggage rack 131
Lumbar support 44
M
M+S tires, refer to Winter
tires 221
Maintenance, refer to Service
Booklet
Maintenance system 227
Malfunction
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– tires 93
Malfunction warnings, refer to
Check Control 84
Manual car wash 230
Manually unlocking parking
lock 63
Manual mode, automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 59
Manual operation
– door lock 30
– driver's door 30
– fuel filler flap 206
– glass roof 38
– parking lock 63
– parking lock, automatic
transmission 59
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
266
Manual transmission 57
Map for navigation
– changing scale 147
– entering destination 140
Map view 146
Master key, refer to Remote
control with integrated
key 26
Maximum cooling 107
Maximum speed
– with winter tires 221
Measurements, refer to
Dimensions 247
Memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
MENU button 16
Menus, refer to iDrive 16
Messages 191
Messages from the concierge
service 191
Microfilter
– BMW Maintenance
System 227
– for automatic climate
control 109
Microfilter/activated-charcoal
filter
– BMW Maintenance
System 227
Microphone
– telephone 14
– voice commands 14
Mirror dimming feature 51
Mirrors 50
– automatic curb monitor 50
– exterior mirrors 50
– heating 50
– interior rearview mirror 51
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
Mirrors, folding in before
entering a car wash 50
Mobile phone
– adjusting volume 187
– connecting, refer to Mobile
phone, pairing 184
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 115
– operation via iDrive 187
– pairing 184
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
Mobile phone, installation
location, refer to Center
armrest 115
Mobile phone, refer to
Telephone 184
Mobile phone, refer to the
separate Owner's Manual
Modifications, technical, refer
to For your own safety 5
Monitor, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Monitoring system for tire
pressures, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 92
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to AUX-IN port
177
MP3 player, connecting, refer
to USB audio interface 178
Multi-channel playback 155
Multifunctional steering
wheel, refer to Buttons on
the steering wheel 11
Multifunction switch
– refer to Turn signals/
headlamp flasher 64
– refer to Wiper system 65
Multimedia screen, refer to
iDrive 16
Music, managing 175
Music collection 172
– backup 176
– deleting 176
– random sequence 175
– restoring 176
Music player, connecting,
refer to AUX-IN port 177
Music player, connecting,
refer to USB audio
interface 178
Music search 173
My Info 191
N
Navigation
– starting destination
guidance after entering a
destination 137
– storing current position 137
– voice activation 141
Navigation announcements,
refer to Switching voice
instructions on/off 146
Navigation data 134
Navigation system 134
– address book 137
– bypassing a route
section 145
– continuing destination
guidance 144
– destination entry 135
– dynamic destination
guidance 145
– entering a destination by
voice 141
– entering a destination
manually 135
– frequently asked
questions 151
– gas station
recommendations 146
– planning a trip 142
– route list 145
– selecting destination via
map 140
– selecting route criteria 144
– special destinations 139
– starting destination
guidance 144
– terminating destination
guidance 144
– traffic bulletins 148
– voice instructions 146
– volume adjustment 146
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
267
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Neck support, refer to Head
restraints 45
Nets, refer to Storage
compartments 116
Neutral 61
New tires 220
Next Service indicator, refer to
Condition Based Service
CBS 227
North-facing map 146
Nozzles 106
Number of cylinders, refer to
Engine data 246
Nylon rope, refer to Tow
rope 242
O
OBD socket, refer to Socket
for Onboard Diagnosis 228
Octane ratings, refer to Fuel
specifications 207
Odometer 75
Oil, refer to Engine oil 223
Oil consumption 223
Oil level 223
Old batteries, refer to
Disposal 237
Onboard vehicle tool kit 233
Opening and closing
– Comfort Access 33
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
– using the door lock 29
– using the remote control 27
Options, selecting for
navigation 144
Orientation menu, refer to
Start menu 17
Outlets
– refer to Ventilation 109
Output, refer to Engine
data 246
Outside-air mode
– automatic climate
control 108
Outside temperature
display 75
– changing unit of measure 80
– in computer 80
Outside temperature
warning 75
Overheated engine, refer to
Coolant temperature 76
Overriding selector lever
lock 59
Overview
– radio control 154
P
Paintwork care 230
Park assistant, refer to Park
Distance Control 88
Park Distance Control PDC 88
Parked car ventilation 110
– preselecting switch-on
times 110
– switching on and off
directly 110
Parking
– vehicle 56
Parking aid, refer to Park
Distance Control PDC 88
Parking brake 57
– indicator lamp 57
Parking lamps 101
– replacing bulbs 234
Parking lamps/low beams 101
Passenger side mirror tilt
function 50
Pathway lighting 102
Personal Profile 26
Phone book 187
Phone numbers
– dialing 188
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Playing music 173
Polish 232
Pollen
– refer to Microfilter/activated-
charcoal filter for automatic
climate control 109
Power failure 237
Power windows 36
Power windows, refer to
Windows 35
Pressure, tires 208
Pressure monitoring, tires 92
– Flat Tire Monitor 92
Pressure monitoring of tires,
refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor TPM 94
Programmable buttons on the
steering wheel 11
Protection function, refer to
Pinch protection system
– glass roof, electric 37
– windows 36
Providing medical assistance,
refer to First aid pouch 239
Puncture
– Flat Tire Monitor 92
R
Radio
– controls 154
– HD Radio 158
– satellite radio 160
– selecting waveband 157
– storing stations 157
– switching on/off 154
– tone control 154
– volume 154
Radio position, refer to Radio
readiness 55
Radio readiness 55
– switched off 56
– switched on 55
Radio-remote key, refer to
Remote control with
integrated key 26
Rain sensor 65
Random sequence
– external devices 180
– music collection 175
Reading lamps 105
Rear lamps, refer to Tail
lamps 235
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
268
Rear seats
– adjusting head restraints 46
– folding down backrests 118
Rear ventilation 109
Rearview mirror, refer to
Mirrors 50
Rear window defroster 108
Rear window roller blind, refer
to Roller sun blinds 114
Receiving level of mobile
phone, refer to Status
information 19
Reception
– quality 158
– radio station 158
Recirculated-air mode 108
Recirculation of air, refer to
Recirculated-air mode 108
Reclining seat, refer to
Backrest 43
Refueling 206
Releasing
– hood 222
Remaining distance, refer to
Cruising range 77
Remote control 26
– battery renewal 35
– Comfort Access 33
– garage door opener 111
– malfunction 29, 35
– removing from the ignition
lock 55
– service data 227
– trunk lid 28
Replacement fuses, refer to
Fuses 237
Replacement remote
control 26
Replacing bulbs, refer to
Lamps and bulbs 233
Replacing tires 220
Replacing tires, refer to New
wheels and tires 220
Reporting safety defects 7
Reserve warning, refer to Fuel
gauge 76
Reset, refer to Resetting tone
settings 156
Restraint systems
– for children 52
– refer to Safety belts 49
Retractable hardtop 38
– care, refer to Caring for your
vehicle brochure
– convenient operation 28
– opening and closing 39
– remote control 28
Reverse
– CD changer 167
– CD player
167
Reverse gear 61
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– manual transmission 58
Road map 146
Roadside
Assistance 199, 238
Roadside parking lamps 103
– replacing bulbs 234
Roadworthiness test, refer to
Service requirements 80
Roller sun blinds 114
Rollover protection system,
Convertible 100
– resetting 100
Roof load capacity 249
Roof-mounted luggage
rack 131
Rope, refer to Tow-starting,
towing away 242
Rotary/pushbutton, refer to
iDrive 16
Route 144, 145
– bypassing sections 145
– changing 144, 145
– changing criteria 144
– displaying streets or towns/
cities 145
– map view 146
– selecting 144
Route instructions, refer to
Destination guidance
through voice
instructions 146
Route map, refer to Map
view 146
Route section, changing 145
Route selection 144
RSC Runflat System
Component, refer to Run-
flat tires 220
Runflat System Component
RSC, refer to Run-flat
tires 220
Run-flat tires 220
– continuing driving with a
damaged tire 93
– flat tire 93
– Flat Tire Monitor 93
– Inflation pressure 208
– new tires 220
– tire replacement 220
– winter tires 221
Runflat tyres, refer to Run-flat
tires 220
S
Safety-belt height
adjustment 49
Safety belts 49
– belt hand-over 49
– damage 49
– indicator/warning lamp 49
– reminder 49
– sitting safely 42
Safety systems
– airbags 98
– Antilock Brake System
ABS 89
– brake system 89
– driving stability control 89
– Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
– rollover protection system,
Convertible 100
– safety belts 49
Safety tires, refer to Run-flat
tires 220
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
269
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Satellite radio 160
– enabling or unsubscribing
from a channel 160
– favorites 162
– selecting channel 161
– storing channel 161
– timeshift 162
– Traffic Jump 163
Saving fuel 126
Screen, refer to iDrive
controls 16
Screw thread for tow
fitting 241
SDARS, refer to Satellite
radio 160
Seat adjustment
– electric 44
– mechanical 43
Seat and mirror memory 48
Seat belt reminder, refer to
"Fasten safety belts"
reminder 49
Seat heating 47
Seats 43
– adjusting electrically 44
– adjusting the seats 43
– heating 47
– memory, refer to Seat and
mirror memory 48
– saving a setting, refer to Seat
and mirror memory 48
– sitting safely 42
Securing cargo 121, 122
Securing the vehicle
– from inside 30
– from outside 27
Selecting a detour 150
Selecting distance for active
cruise control 70
Selecting new scale for
navigation 147
Selector lever
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
Selector lever lock, refer to
Changing selector lever
positions, shiftlock 58
Selector lever positions 60
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
Service, refer to Roadside
Assistance 238
Service car, refer to Roadside
Assistance 238
Service data in the remote
control 227
Service Interval Display, refer
to Condition Based Service
CBS 227
Service Request 201
Service requirements 80
Service status
202
Settings
– changing on the Control
Display 87
– clock, 12h/24h format 83
– DVD 168
– language 87
Settings and information 79
Settings for the map view 147
Setting times, refer to
Preselecting switch-on
times 110
Shifting 62
– 7-gear Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch 61
Shifting gears
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 59
– manual transmission 57
Shift into a drive position, refer
to selector lever
positions 60
Shiftlock
– automatic transmission,
refer to Changing selector
lever positions 58
Shift paddles on the steering
wheel 62
Short commands for the voice
activation system 251
Short route in navigation, refer
to Selecting route 144
Shuffled, refer to Random
– CD changer 166
– CD player 166
Side airbags 98
Side windows, refer to
Windows 35
Signal horn, refer to
Horn 10, 11
Sitting safely 42
– with airbags 42
– with head restraint 42
– with safety belts 42
Ski bag 120
Ski bag for Convertible, refer
to Through-loading opening
with integrated transport
bag 121
Sliding/tilt sunroof, refer to
Glass roof, electric 37
Slot for remote control 55
Smokers' package, refer to
Ashtray 117
Snap-in adapter
– inserting/removing 195
– use 184
Snap-in adapter, refer to
Center armrest storage
compartment 115
Socket, Onboard Diagnosis
OBD 228
Socket, refer to Connecting
electrical appliances 118
SOS, refer to Sending an
Emergency Request
238
Sound, adjusting during audio
playback, refer to Tone
control 154
Sound output for
entertainment on/off 154
Spare fuses 237
Special destinations 139
Special destinations,
displaying 140
Speed
– Run-flat tires 93
– with winter tires 221
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
270
Speed limit 86
Speed limit warning, refer to
Speed limit 86
Speedometer 12
Speed reading, refer to
Speedometer 12
Speed Volume 155
Split screen, refer to Control
Display, switching on/off 19
Split screen content, refer to
Display for split screen
content, selecting 20
Sport program with 7-gear
Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch 61
Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch 60
– driving dynamics control 62
– Kick-down 61
– Launch Control 64
– manually unlocking parking
lock 63
– neutral 61
– reverse gear 61
Spray nozzles, refer to
Cleaning windshield and
headlamps 66
Stability control, refer to
Driving stability control
systems 89
Start/stop button 55
– starting the engine 56
– switching off the engine 56
Starting, refer to Starting the
engine 56
Starting assistance, refer to
Jump-starting 239
Starting difficulties
– jump-starting 239
Starting the engine
– start/stop button 55
Start menu 17
State/province, for
navigation 135
Station, selecting
– radio 157
Status of this Owner's Manual
at time of printing 5
Steam jet 229, 230
Steering wheel 51
– adjustment 51
– buttons on steering
wheel 11
– heating 51
– lock 55
– locking with Comfort
Access 34
– shift paddles 62
Steering wheel buttons, refer
to Shift paddles 62
Steering with variable ratio,
refer to Active steering
96
Steptronic, refer to Automatic
transmission with
Steptronic 58
Storage 232
Storage compartments 116
Storage nets 120
Stored trip, calling up 143
Storing a destination in the
address book 137
Storing music 172
Storing seat positions, refer to
Seat and mirror memory 48
Storing tires 221
Stowage, refer to Storage
compartments 116
Street, entering,
navigation 136
Summer tires, refer to Wheels
and tires 208
Surround 155
SVCD 167
SW, waveband 157
Switches, refer to Cockpit 10
Switching off
– engine 56
Switching off the engine
– start/stop button 55
Switching on
– audio 154
– CD changer 154
– CD player 154
– radio 154
Switching the cooling function
on and off 108
Switch-on times of parked car
ventilation, preselecting 110
Symbols 4
– status information 19
T
Tachometer 75
Tailgate, refer to Trunk lid 31
Tail lamp
– replacing bulb 235
Tail lamp, refer to Tail
lamps 235
Tail lamps 235
– replacing bulb 235, 236
Tank contents, refer to
Capacities 250
Technical data 246
– dimensions 247
Technical modifications, refer
to For your own safety 5
Telephone 184
– installation location, refer to
Center armrest 115
– refer to separate Owner's
Manual
– voice commands 192
TeleService 199
TeleService Diagnosis 200
TeleService Help 200
Temperature
– automatic climate
control 107
– changing unit of measure 80
– coolant, refer to Coolant
temperature 76
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
271
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Temperature display
– outside temperature 75
– outside temperature
warning 75
– setting the units 80
Tempomat, refer to Cruise
control 66
Tensioning straps, refer to
Securing cargo 130
The individual vehicle 5
Third brake lamp, refer to
Center brake lamp 235
Through-loading opening with
integrated transport
bag 121
Through-loading system 118
Tilt alarm sensor 33
Tilt function, passenger side
mirror 50
Timer, refer to Preselecting
switch-on times 110
Tire inflation pressure 208
– loss 93, 94
Tire pressure monitoring,
refer to Flat Tire Monitor 92
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
– resetting the system 95
– system limitations 94
– warning lamp 95
Tire puncture, refer to Flat Tire
Monitor 93
Tire Quality Grading 218
Tires
– age 218, 220
– air loss 95
– breaking in 126
– changing, refer to Changing
wheels 236
– condition 219
– damage 219
– inflation pressure 208
– labels 218
– minimum tread depth 219
– new wheels and tires 220
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Flat Tire Monitor 92
– pressure monitoring, refer to
Tire Pressure Monitor
TPM 94
– puncture 93
– replacing 220
– size 218
– storage 221
– tread depth 219
– wear indicators, refer to
Minimum tread depth 219
– wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 220
– winter tires 221
TMC station, refer to Traffic
bulletins 148
Tone
– control 154
– middle setting 156
Tools, refer to Onboard
vehicle tool kit 233
Top, refer to Retractable
hardtop 38
Top 50 of music
collection 174
Torque, refer to Engine
data 246
Tow bar 242
Tow fitting 241
– screw thread 241
Tow fittings for tow-starting
and towing away 241
Towing 241
– car with automatic
transmission 241
– methods 242
– with 7-gear Sports
automatic transmission with
double clutch 242
Towing and tow-starting 241
Town/city, for navigation 135
Tow rope 242
Tow-starting 241, 243
TPM, refer to Tire Pressure
Monitor 94
Track
– selecting on CD 165
Traction control, refer to
Dynamic Stability Control
DSC 89
Traffic bulletins
– categories 149
Traffic bulletins, filtering 149
Traffic bulletins for
navigation 148
– display in map view 149
– during destination
guidance 150
Traffic jam
– displaying traffic
bulletins 148
Transmission
– 7-gear Sports automatic
transmission with double
clutch 60
– automatic transmission with
Steptronic 58
– idle position 61
– Launch Control 64
– manually unlocking parking
lock 63
– manual transmission 57
– overriding selector lever lock
for automatic transmission
with Steptronic 59
– reverse gear 61
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Everything from A to Z
272
Transmission interlock
– refer to Changing selector
lever position 58
– refer to P Park 58
Transporting children
safely 52
Transport securing devices,
refer to Securing cargo 130
Tread depth, refer to Minimum
tire tread 219
Trip, deleting 143
Trip, storing 143
Trip computer, refer to
Displays on the Control
Display 77
Trip-distance counter, refer to
Trip odometer 75
Triple turn signal activation 65
Trip odometer 75
Trips, changing 143
Trunk lid 31
– Comfort Access 34
– emergency release 32
– locking or unlocking
separately 31
– opening from inside 31
– opening from outside 31
– remote control 28
Turning circle, refer to
Dimensions 247
Turn signal indicators
– indicator/warning lamp 12
Turn signals 64
– triple turn signal 65
Tying down loads, refer to
Cargo loading 130
U
Uniform Tire Quality Grading/
UTQR 218
Units
– average fuel
consumption 80
Units of measure
– temperature 80
Universal garage door opener,
refer to Integrated universal
remote control 111
Universal mobile phone
preparation package, refer
to separate Owner's Manual
Unlatching, refer to
Unlocking 33
Unlocking
– from inside 31
– from outside 27
– setting unlocking
characteristics 28
– trunk lid 34
– without remote control, refer
to Comfort Access 33
Updating the navigation
data 134
USB audio interface 178
V
VCD 167
Vehicle
– battery 237
– breaking in 126
– cargo loading 129
– Identification Number, refer
to Engine compartment 223
– measurements, refer to
Dimensions 247
– parking 56
– weight 249
Vehicle jack 236
Vehicle storage 232
Ventilation 109
– draft-free 109
– in the rear 109
Ventilation, refer to
Climate 106
Ventilation while at a
standstill 110
Vents, refer to Ventilation 109
Video menu 167
Video playback 167
Voice, refer to Destination
guidance through voice
instructions 146
Voice commands
– overview 22
– short commands 251
– telephone 192
Voice instructions from
navigation system 146
– repeating 146
– switching on/off 146
– volume 146
Voice phone book 193
Volume 154
– audio sources 154
– fuel tank, refer to
Capacities 250
– mobile phone 187
– voice instructions 146
Volume balance, tone
setting 155
W
Warning and indicator
lamps 13
Warning messages, refer to
Check Control 84
Warning triangle 239
Washer fluid 66
– content of the reservoir 66
Washer fluid reservoir 66
Waste tray, refer to
Ashtray 117
Water on roads, refer to
Driving through water 128
Water penetration 229, 230
Waveband with the radio 157
Wear indicators in tires, refer
to Minimum tread depth 219
Weights 249
Welcome lamps 101
Wheel/tire combination, refer
to Correct wheels and
tires 220
Wheelbase, refer to
Dimensions 247
Wheels, new 220
Wheels and tires 208
Width, refer to
Dimensions 247
Wind deflector 40
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Reference
273
At a glanceControlsDriving tipsCommunications NavigationEntertainmentMobility
Windows 35
– convenient operation 28
– convenient operation with
Comfort Access 34
– opening, closing 36
– pinch protection system 36
Windows, indicator on Control
Display 16
Windshield
– cleaning 66
Windshield wash 65
– filling capacity, reservoir 250
– nozzles 66
– reservoir for washer fluid 66
– washer fluid 66
Windshield wiper blades,
changing 233
Windshield wipers, refer to
Wiper system 65
Winter tires 221
– setting speed limit 86
– storage 221
Wiper blade replacement 233
Wiper system 65
Word-matching principle for
navigation 143
Work in the engine
compartment 222
Wrench/screwdriver, refer to
Onboard vehicle tool kit 233
X
xDrive 90
Xenon lamps
– replacing bulb 234
Y
Your individual vehicle
– settings, refer to Personal
Profile 26
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
01 41 2 604 638 Ue iDrive
*BL2604638007*
The Ultimate
Driving Machine
More about BMW
bmwusa.com
Online Edition for Part no. 01 41 2 604 638 - © 02/10 BMW AG
